2008 Saturn SKY Owner Manual M

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1 Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2 Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2
Safety Belts .............................................. 1-6 Towing ................................................... 4-28
Child Restraints ....................................... 1-22 Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Airbag System ......................................... 1-36 Service ..................................................... 5-3
Restraint System Check ............................ 1-50 Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1 Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10
Keys ........................................................ 2-2 Rear Axle ............................................... 5-44
Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-6 Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-44
Windows ................................................. 2-10 Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-44
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-12 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-49
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-16 Tires ...................................................... 5-50
Mirrors .................................................... 2-29 Appearance Care ..................................... 5-84
OnStar® System ...................................... 2-30 Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-93
Storage Areas ......................................... 2-33 Electrical System ...................................... 5-94
Convertible Top ....................................... 2-34 Capacities and Specifications ..................... 5-99
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1 Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4 Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Climate Controls ...................................... 3-17 Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-20 Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-38 Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-14
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-50 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 7-16
Index ................................................................ 1
 Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
SATURN and the SATURN Emblem are registered 1-800-551-4123
trademarks of Saturn Corporation. GENERAL MOTORS www.helminc.com
and GM are registered trademarks and the name SKY
is a trademark of General Motors Corporation. Propriétaires Canadiens
This manual includes the latest information at the time it On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
after that time without further notice. Helm Incorporated
This manual describes features that may be available in P.O. Box 07130
this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them. Detroit, MI 48207
For example, more than one entertainment system may 1-800-551-4123
be offered or your vehicle may have been ordered www.helminc.com
without a front passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 15859547 A First Printing 2007 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

ii
Using this Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to {CAUTION:
end when they first receive their new vehicle to learn
about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures These mean there is something that could hurt
and words work together to explain things. you or other people.

Index We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help

A good place to quickly locate information about the avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found. A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
Safety Warnings and Symbols “Do Not,” “Do Not do
this” or “Do Not let this
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
happen.”
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.

iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual. The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
Notice: These mean there is something that could the text describing the operation or information
damage your vehicle. relating to a specific component, control, message,
A notice tells about something that can damage the gage, or indicator.
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

iv
 Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2 Airbag System ...............................................1-36
Manual Seats ................................................1-2 Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-38
Seat Height Adjuster .......................................1-2 When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-40
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-3 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-41
Seatback Latches ...........................................1-5 How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-41
Safety Belts .....................................................1-6 What Will You See After an
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-6 Airbag Inflates? .........................................1-42
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-11 Passenger Sensing System ............................1-43
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-19 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-48
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-21 Adding Equipment to Your
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-22 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............................1-48
Child Restraints .............................................1-22 Restraint System Check ..................................1-50
Older Children ..............................................1-22 Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-50
Infants and Young Children ............................1-26 Replacing Restraint System Parts
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-29 After a Crash ............................................1-51
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) ..................................................1-31
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ............................1-32

1-1
Front Seats Seat Height Adjuster
Your vehicle may have a power driver’s seat height
Manual Seats adjuster.

{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the lever located under

the front of the seat to
unlock it.
The switch is located on the front of the driver’s seat on
the outboard side. To use the adjuster, first move the
seat to where you want it. See Manual Seats on
page 1-2. To raise or lower the seat, hold the switch
up or down.

Slide the seat to where you want it and release the

lever. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the
seat is locked in place.

1-2
Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seatback, turn the knob on the outboard

side of the seatback until the seatback is in the
desired position.

1-3
 {CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is

moving.

1-4
Seatback Latches To fold the seatback forward, lift the latch and push the
seatback forward.
The seats have a latch
located on the outboard
side near the top of {CAUTION:
the seatback that enables
the front seatback(s) to
fold forward. If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.

This allows access to the map pocket on the rear of the

seatback.

1-5
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
not do with safety belts. collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
{CAUTION: that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot seat and using a safety belt properly.
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt, Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-23.
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
from it and be seriously injured or killed. In the law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
and check that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.

1-6
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.

Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on

wheels.

1-7
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider The person keeps going until stopped by something.
does not stop. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-8
or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.

1-9
Questions and Answers About Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
Safety Belts home, why should I wear safety belts?

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
I am wearing a safety belt?
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety driver does not protect you from things beyond your
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious control, such as bad drivers.
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
and get out, is much greater if you are belted. of home. And the greatest number of serious
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
upside down. 40 mph (65 km/h).

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to Safety belts are for everyone.
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.

1-10
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-22
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-26. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.

1-11
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly

as much protection this way.

1-12
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is
too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the
lap belt and apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give as much

protection this way.

1-13
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not on the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-14
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest.

1-15
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should

be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-16
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt.
The belt force would then be applied right on
the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.

A: The belt is behind the body.

1-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

1-18
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
belt go back all the way and start again. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-22.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.

1-19
 4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
shoulder belt. The belt should go back out of the way. When the safety
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the belt webbing. The latch plate should rest on the stitching
lap belt on smaller occupants. on the safety belt, near the guide loop.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.

1-20
Safety Belt Pretensioners Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them, women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-51.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and

the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.

1-21
Safety Belt Extender Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it. Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit.
The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
attach it to the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that comes
with the extender.

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should

wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

1-22
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
belt until the child passes the below fit test: get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
the booster seat. hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, then
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
return to the booster seat.
a crash.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
safer when properly restrained in rear seating positions
the booster seat.
than in the front seating positions.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
to the booster seat.
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.

1-23
 {CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured.
A belt must be used by only one person at
a time.

1-24
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child might slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.

1-25
Infants and Young Children Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
infants and all other children. Neither the distance can strike other people, or can be thrown out of
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the vehicle. In addition, young children should not use
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need to use a
the law in every state in the United States and in child restraint.
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION: People should never hold an infant in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. An infant does
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if not weigh much — until a crash. During a
a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck crash an infant will become so heavy it is not
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at
leave children unattended in a vehicle and never only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant
allow children to play with the safety belts. will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.

1-26
 CAUTION: (Continued)

children, but not for young children and

infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.

{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
CAUTION: (Continued)

1-27
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints? {CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. Newborn infants need complete support,
Selection of a particular restraint should take including support for the head and neck.
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height, This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
and age but also whether or not the restraint will neck is weak and its head weighs so much
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
be used. an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
For most basic types of child restraints, there are the restraint, so the crash forces can be
many different models available. When purchasing a distributed across the strongest part of an
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used infant’s body, the back and shoulders.
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a Infants should always be secured in
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle appropriate infant restraints.
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.

1-28
 Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION: A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
The body structure of a young child is quite with the seating surface
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom against the back of
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s the infant.
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that is unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
injuries. Young children should always be crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
secured in appropriate child restraints.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.

1-29
 Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle

{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.

A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to

improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
window. must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.

1-30
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can Lower Anchors and Tethers for
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure Children (LATCH)
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
Some child restraints have a LATCH system. As part of
is in it.
the LATCH system, your child restraint may have
Securing the Child Within the Child lower attachments and/or a top tether. The LATCH
system can help hold the child restraint in place during
Restraint driving or in a crash. Some vehicles have lower
and/or top tether anchors designed to secure a child
restraint with lower attachments and/or a top tether.
{CAUTION: Some child restraints with a top tether are designed to
be used whether the top tether is anchored or not.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a Other child restraints require that the top tether
crash if the child is not properly secured in the be anchored. A national or local law may require that
child restraint. Because there are different the top tether be anchored.
systems, it is important to refer to the In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
instructions that come with the restraint. restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
Make sure the child is properly secured, attached.
following the instructions that came with that Your vehicle does not have lower anchors or top tether
restraint. anchors to secure a child restraint with the LATCH
system. If a national or local law requires that your top
tether be anchored, do not use a child restraint in
this vehicle because a top tether cannot be properly
anchored. You must use the safety belts to secure your
child restraint in this vehicle, unless a national or local
law requires that the top tether be anchored. Refer
to your child restraint instructions and instructions in this
manual for securing a child restraint using the vehicle’s
safety belts.
1-31
Securing a Child Restraint in the
CAUTION: (Continued)
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. In addition, your vehicle has a Even though the passenger sensing system
passenger sensing system which is designed to turn is designed to turn off the right front
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
conditions. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-43 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on detects a rear-facing child restraint, no system
page 3-25 for more information on this, including is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
important safety information. airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
We recommend that rear-facing child restraints
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. be secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag
is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
{CAUTION: the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
seriously injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-43
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because for additional information.
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
CAUTION: (Continued) Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-31
for how to install your child restraint using LATCH.

1-32
If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
Children (LATCH) on page 1-31 for top tether anchor around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
locations. will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. Make sure the release button is positioned so you
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
page 3-25. if necessary.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

1-33
 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of 6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
the retractor to set the lock. pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt
back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.

1-34
 7. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
using a top tether anchor, attach and tighten the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure
top tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
the instructions that came with the child restraint restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
and to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
(LATCH) on page 1-31. cushion if possible.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different Remove any additional material from the seat such as
directions to be sure it is secure. blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when child restraint.
the vehicle is started. If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a child restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on in this vehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the safety belt and let it go back all the way.
child restraint.

1-35
Airbag System Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver. {CAUTION:
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger. if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection during a crash helps reduce your chance of
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags hitting things inside the vehicle or being
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
very quickly to do their job. designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.

1-36
{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Airbags are designed to deploy in moderate Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes. blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
They are not designed to inflate in rollover, very close to, any airbag when it inflates can
rear crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
some unrestrained occupants, airbags may unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you
provide less protection in frontal crashes than would be if you were sitting on the edge of
more forceful airbags have provided in the your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help
past. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a keep you in position before and during a
safety belt properly — whether or not there is crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
an airbag for that person. airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.

1-37
 Where Are the Airbags?
{CAUTION:
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its airbag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children
on page 1-22 or Infants and Young Children on
page 1-26.

There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol. The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.

The system checks the airbag electrical system for

malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-24
for more information.

1-38
 {CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.

The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument

panel on the passenger’s side.

1-39
When Should an Airbag Inflate? Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to • If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or vehicle hits a moving object.
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a • If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and • If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
help restrain the occupants.
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends • If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

1-40
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle How Does an Airbag Restrain?
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
airbag should have inflated simply because of the even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how of the vehicle.
quickly the vehicle slows down. Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually.
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, Inflate? on page 1-40 for more information.
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the
airbag module. Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel.

1-41
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? {CAUTION:
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not even realize the When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in
airbags inflated. Some components of the airbag module the air. This dust could cause breathing
may be hot for several minutes. For location of the problems for people with a history of asthma
airbag modules, see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
page 1-41. everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent opening a window or a door. If you experience
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being breathing problems following an airbag
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from deployment, you should seek medical
leaving the vehicle. attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically

unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn on
the hazard warning flashers when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and
turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.

1-42
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag, Passenger Sensing System
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger airbag. right front passenger’s position. The passenger
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for panel when you start your vehicle.
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on United States Canada
page 7-16 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-16.
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag will be visible during the system check. If you are
system. Improper service can mean that the using remote start to start your vehicle from a distance,
airbag system will not work properly. See your if equipped, you may not see the system check.
dealer/retailer for service. When the system check is complete, either the word
ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol
for off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-25.

1-43
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag is not part of the passenger {CAUTION:
sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The sensors seriously injured or killed if the right front
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
occupant and determine if the right front passenger’s the back of the rear-facing child restraint
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if Even though the passenger sensing system is
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
We recommend that rear-facing child restraints not
frontal airbag if the system detects a
be transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to airbag will not deploy under some unusual
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. circumstance, even though it is turned off.
We recommend that rear-facing child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag
is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

1-44
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off If a child restraint has been installed and the on
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if: indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied. restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
• The system determines that an infant is present in and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
a rear-facing infant seat. Seat Position on page 1-32.
• The system determines that a small child is present If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
in a child restraint. vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure
that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
• The system determines that a small child is present restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
in a booster seat. recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of cushion if possible.
the seat for a period of time. Remove any additional material from the seat such as
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the
child restraints. child restraint.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a child restraint
system or the passenger sensing system. in this vehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator (may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off. anytime the system senses that a person of adult size
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-25. is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.

1-45
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any
additional material from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers
and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully
upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for two to three minutes. Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
This will allow the system to detect that person and seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
then enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag. helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.

1-46
 We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
{CAUTION: approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument page 1-48 for more information about modifications
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it that can affect how the system operates.
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an {CAUTION:
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
on page 3-24 for more on this, including seatback may interfere with the proper
important safety information. operation of the passenger sensing system.

A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or

cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.

1-47
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Adding Equipment to Your
Vehicle Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
from working properly?
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
see Service Publications Ordering Information on frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
page 7-15. sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
{CAUTION: and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, front sensors, or airbag wiring can affect
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is the operation of the airbag system.
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
airbag can still inflate during improper service. system for the right front passenger’s position,
You can be injured if you are close to an which includes sensors that are part of the
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing system
connectors. They are probably part of the may not operate properly if the original seat trim
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim,
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.

1-48
or with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
a different vehicle. Any object, such as an vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad this will affect my airbag system?
or device, installed under or on top of the seat
fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
passenger sensing system. This could either The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
prevent proper deployment of the passenger Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s). Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-43. In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
If you have any questions about this, you should have information about the location of the airbag
contact Customer Assistance before you modify sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for wiring.
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

1-49
Restraint System Check Airbags
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
Checking the Restraint Systems maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-24 for more information.
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
and anchorages are working properly. are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety For the location of the airbag modules, see What
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-41. See your
frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. dealer/retailer for service.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-23 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 5-87.

1-50
Replacing Restraint System Parts If you have had a crash, do you need new belts?

After a Crash After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.

But the belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
{CAUTION: inspected or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
A crash can damage the restraint systems in belt was not being used at the time of the crash.
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
may not properly protect the person using it, system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
resulting in serious injury or even death in a in this section.
crash. To help make sure your restraint
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
systems are working properly after a crash,
vehicle has been in a crash, or if your airbag readiness
have them inspected and any necessary light stays on after you start your vehicle or while
replacements made as soon as possible. you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 3-24.

1-51
✍ NOTES

1-52
 Section 2 Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2 Starting the Engine (Key Access) ....................2-18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-3 Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-20
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Manual Transmission Operation ......................2-23
Operation ...................................................2-4 Parking Brake ..............................................2-24
Doors and Locks .............................................2-6 Shifting Into PARK (P)
Door Locks ....................................................2-6 (Automatic Transmission) ............................2-25
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-6 Shifting Out of PARK (P) ...............................2-26
Delayed Locking .............................................2-7 Parking Your Vehicle
Automatic Door Lock .......................................2-7 (Manual Transmission) ...............................2-27
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ...............2-7 Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-27
Lockout Protection ..........................................2-8 Engine Exhaust ............................................2-27
Trunk ............................................................2-8 Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-28
Windows ........................................................2-10 Mirrors ...........................................................2-29
Power Windows ............................................2-11 Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-29
Sun Visors ...................................................2-12 Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ................2-29
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-12 Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-29
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-12 OnStar® System .............................................2-30
PASS-Key® III+ ............................................2-14 Storage Areas ................................................2-33
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ..............................2-14 Glove Box ...................................................2-33
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-16 Cupholder(s) ................................................2-33
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-16 Center Console Storage .................................2-33
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-16 Convertible Top ..............................................2-34
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-18

2-1
Keys

{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.
Your vehicle has a vehicle theft-deterrent system.
The key has a transponder in the key head that is
electronically coded to match a decoder in your vehicle
that allows the key to start the vehicle. If a replacement
key or any additional key is needed, you must purchase it
from your dealer/retailer. See PASS-Key® III+ Operation
on page 2-14 for additional information.

2-2
The key has a bar-coded key tag that a dealer/retailer This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle. 1. This device may not cause interference.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle, 2. This device must accept any interference received,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. including interference that may cause undesired
Be sure you have spare keys. operation of the device.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside Changes or modifications to this system by other than
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on an authorized service facility could void authorization to
page 7-7. use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in operating range.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) This is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer to
System your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on • Check the distance. You may be too far from your
a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. rainy or snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. • Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
1. This device may not cause interference.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
2. This device must accept any interference received, necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
including interference that may cause undesired section.
operation of the device.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.

2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) The interior lamps will come on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabled
System Operation through the DIC, the parking lamps will flash once
to indicate unlocking has occurred. See “UNLOCK
The vehicle’s doors can HORN” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on
be locked and unlocked, page 3-45.
and the trunk can be
unlatched from about V (Trunk Release): Press and hold this button for
3 feet (1 m) up to 60 feet approximately one second to release the trunk lid.
(18 m) away with the The trunk release will only work if the ignition is off or
Remote Keyless Entry the vehicle speed is less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
(RKE) transmitter.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
this button to help locate your vehicle. The horn will
sound three times and the hazard lamps will flash three
times. Press and hold the button for three seconds to
sound the panic alarm. The horn will sound and
the hazard lamps will flash for 30 seconds. The ignition
Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the doors. must be off for the vehicle locator/remote alarm to
work. Press the vehicle locator/panic alarm button again
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
or turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
the parking lamps may flash once and the horn may chirp
to turn off the alarm.
to indicate locking has occurred. See “LOCK HORN”
under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-45. The vehicle may have Remote Lock/Unlock Confirmation.
This feature provides feedback that a command has been
" (Unlock): Press the unlock button one time to received by the vehicle. The parking lamps will flash and
unlock the driver’s door. Press the unlock button the horn may sound briefly. See “LOCK HORN” and
again within five seconds to unlock the other doors. “UNLOCK HORN” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-45 for programming information.

2-4
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is uniquely coded to prevent
another transmitter from unlocking the vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer/retailer. Remember
to bring any additional transmitters so they can also be
re-coded to match the new transmitter. Once your
dealer/retailer has coded the new transmitter, the lost
transmitter cannot unlock the vehicle. The vehicle
can have a maximum of four transmitters coded to it.

Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in the RKE transmitter
should last about four years.
If the battery is weak the transmitter will not work within To replace the battery do the following:
its normal range. It is probably time to change the 1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the notch,
battery if you have to be very close to the vehicle before located below the trunk release button, and pry the
the transmitter works. front and back apart.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to 2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a metal
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body object to do this.
transferred to these surfaces may damage the 3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with the
transmitter. positive side of the battery facing up. Use a type
CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.
4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter
together.
5. Test the operation of the transmitter with the
vehicle.

2-5
Doors and Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
From the outside, turn the key in the driver’s door
Door Locks lock cylinder briefly counterclockwise to unlock the
driver’s door. Turn and hold it to unlock all the doors.
You can also use the remote keyless entry transmitter.
From the inside use the manual or power door locks.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Power Door Locks
• Passengers, especially children, can easily You can use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
open the doors and fall out of a moving transmitter to lock and unlock the doors from inside
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle or outside the vehicle. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
will not open it. You increase the chance System Operation on page 2-4 for more information.
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a On vehicles with power door locks, the switches
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear are located on the doors.
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive. Q(Lock): Press to lock all doors.
• Young children who get into unlocked K (Unlock): Press to unlock all doors.
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.

2-6
Delayed Locking Automatic Door Lock
If your vehicle has power door locks, it will have the The vehicle’s doors are programmed to lock when the
delayed locking feature. This feature delays the actual shift lever is moved into a forward gear.
locking of the doors when the Remote Keyless If someone needs to get in or out of the vehicle after
Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to lock the vehicle. the doors have been locked, place the shift lever
If any door is open when locking the vehicle using the into PARK (P). You may also unlock all doors using the
RKE transmitter, three chimes will sound signaling power door lock switch or unlock one door using the
that the delayed locking feature is active. Five seconds inside manual door lock.
after the last door is closed, both doors will lock and The automatic door lock feature cannot be disabled.
the parking lamps will flash. To cancel the delay
and lock the doors immediately, press the lock button
on the RKE a second time. Programmable Automatic Door
If the key is in the ignition, this feature will not lock Unlock
the doors.
The vehicle’s doors are programmed from the factory to
unlock when the shift lever is moved into PARK (P).
On vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
there are different programming options for unlocking the
doors automatically. See DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-45.

2-7
Lockout Protection
The lockout protection feature makes it more difficult to {CAUTION:
lock the key in the vehicle. If the driver’s door is
open while the key is in the ignition, the door cannot be It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
locked with the power door lock switch. open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
This feature cannot guarantee that you will never be come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
locked out of the vehicle. If the key is not left in smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
the ignition, or, if the manual door lock is used, even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
the key could still be locked inside the vehicle. open or if electrical wiring or other cable
Always remember to take the key with you. connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
Trunk • Make sure all other windows are shut.
To release the trunk lid use either the Remote Keyless • Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
Entry (RKE) transmitter, or see “Remote Trunk system to its highest speed and select the
Release” following. control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
To close the trunk, push down firmly from the rear System.
center of the trunk lid. • If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-27.

2-8
Remote Trunk Release Emergency Trunk Release Handle
To open the trunk from
inside the vehicle, press
the remote trunk release
button located in the
glovebox.

The remote trunk release will only work when either the
ignition is off or in ACC/ACCESSORY, the parking
brake is engaged, or the vehicle speed is less than
2 mph (3 km/h). Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the driver’s side.
This handle will glow following exposure to light.
If someone is locked in the trunk, they can pull the
release handle and push the trunk lid open from
the inside to open the trunk.

2-9
Windows

{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.

2-10
Power Windows On vehicles with power
windows, the switches on
the driver’s door armrest
control both windows.
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
The passenger’s door has a window switch that controls
key is dangerous for many reasons, children or that window. Press the front of the switch to open the
others could be badly injured or even killed. window. Pull the switch up to close it.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.

2-11
Express-Down Window Theft-Deterrent Systems
Windows with an express-down feature allow the Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
window to be lowered fully without pressing and holding Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
the switch. Press the front of the switch to the first features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
position, and the window opens a small amount. impossible to steal.
Press the switch down fully and the window goes all the
way down.
Content Theft-Deterrent
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull up the front
of the switch. Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm
system.
Sun Visors The security light, located
To use the sun visor(s), pull the edge of the visor on the instrument panel
nearest to the windshield toward you. cluster, will turn on to
indicate that arming has
Visor Vanity Mirror been initiated.
Your vehicle may have a driver’s side vanity mirror.
Swing down the sun visor and slide the cover to expose
the mirror.
Once the system is armed, the security light will flash
once every three seconds.
If the security light is flashing twice per second, this
means that a door is open.

2-12
Arming the System How the System Alarm is Activated
While the ignition is off, press the Remote Keyless To activate the system if it is armed:
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock button, to arm the system. • Open the driver’s door or trunk. This causes a ten
The system will arm after either of these things occur: second pre-alarm chirping noise followed by the
• Thirty seconds after all the doors are closed. horn sounding and lights flashing for 30 seconds.
• Sixty seconds with any door open. • Open a passenger’s door. This immediately causes
a full alarm of the horn sounding and lights flashing
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a second
for 30 seconds.
time while all the doors are closed, the system will
arm immediately. The system arms in 60 seconds if a After the 30 second alarm ends, the system will
door is open, or after the open door is closed. re-arm itself.
If you do not want to arm the system, lock the car with How to Turn Off the System Alarm
the manual door lock knobs.
To turn off the system alarm, do one of the following:
Disarming the System • Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
To disarm the system: The system will then re-arm itself.
• Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter. • Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
• Turn the ignition on. This will also disarm the system.
If the system is armed and the trunk is opened using • Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on.
the trunk release button on the transmitter, the system This will also disarm the system.
will temporarily disarm itself and re-arm when the
trunk has been closed. This allows you to exit the How to Detect a Tamper Condition
vehicle, lock the doors using the transmitter, or open the If you hear three chirps when you press the unlock, lock,
trunk using the transmitter without having to disarm or trunk release buttons on the RKE transmitter, it means
and re-arm the system. that the content theft security system alarm was activated
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will stop previously.
flashing.

2-13
PASS-Key® III+ PASS-Key® III+ Operation
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
frequency subject to Federal Communications Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. The system is automatically armed when the key
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: is removed from the ignition.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
2. This device must accept any interference received, The security light will come on if there is a problem
including interference that may cause undesired with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
operation.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
1. This device may not cause interference. the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
operation of the device. start and the security light comes on, there may be
a problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn the
Changes or modifications to this system by other than ignition off and try again.
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.

2-14
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to To program the new key:
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, 1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-94. If the engine still 2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be see your dealer/retailer for service.
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the 3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-7, for more information. 4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the
ON/RUN position within five seconds of the original
®
It may be possible for the PASS-Key III+ decoder key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.
to “learn” the transponder value of a new or replacement
The security light will turn off once the key has
key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the
been programmed.
vehicle. The following procedure is for programming
additional keys only. If all the currently programmed 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
keys are lost or do not operate, you must see your be programmed.
dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
PASS-Key® III+ to have keys made and programmed and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if
to the system. you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service is not working properly and must be serviced by your
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system. PASS-Key® III+ system at this time.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.

2-15
Starting and Operating Ignition Positions
Your Vehicle With the key in the ignition
switch, you can turn it to
four different positions.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines for the first
500 miles (805 km):
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow.
• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Do not make full-throttle starts; also refrain
from using the full throttle while driving.
Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle. In order to shift out of PARK (P), ignition must be in
If these break-in procedures are not followed, ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake
the vehicle’s engine, axle, or other parts could be pedal must be applied.
damaged. Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles ignition switch could cause damage or break the
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in.
linings can mean premature wear and earlier If it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline you turn the key hard. If none of this works,
every time you get new brake linings. then your vehicle needs service.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.

2-16
9 (LOCK/OFF): This position locks your steering R (ON/RUN): This is the position the switch returns to
column. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only be after you start your engine and release the switch.
able to remove your key when the ignition is turned The switch stays in ON/RUN when the engine is
to LOCK/OFF. running. But even when the engine is not running, you
can use ON/RUN to operate your electrical accessories
If you have an automatic transmission, the ignition
and to display some warning and indicator lights.
switch cannot be turned to LOCK/OFF unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P). The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
If you have a manual transmission, the ignition switch ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the
can be turned to LOCK/OFF in any shift lever position. engine off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if
the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
{CAUTION: / (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch
If you have a manual transmission removing will return to ON/RUN for normal driving.
the key from the ignition switch will lock the A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s door
steering column and result in a loss of ability while in LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY, when
to steer the vehicle. This could cause a the key has not been removed from the ignition.
collision. If you need to turn the engine off
while the vehicle is moving, turn the key to
ACC/ACCESSORY.

ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position operates

some of your electrical accessories. It unlocks the
steering wheel and ignition.

2-17
Key In the Ignition Starting the Engine
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is an Place the transmission in the proper gear.
easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave the
key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime Automatic Transmission
will sound, when you open the driver’s door. Always
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
remember to remove your key from the ignition and take
The engine will not start in any other position — this is
it with you. This will lock your ignition and transmission.
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
Also, always remember to lock the doors.
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
extended period of time. transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Manual Transmission

These vehicle accessories can be used for up to The shift lever should be in neutral position and the
10 minutes after the engine is turned off: parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal down to
• Audio System the floor and start the engine. Your vehicle will not
start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down. That is
• Power Windows a safety feature.
The radio will work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned off, power
to the radio and windows will continue to work for
up to 10 minutes or until any door is opened.

2-18
Starting Procedure 2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the
transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts,
and lubricate all moving parts. let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking briefly but then stops again, do the same thing.
System. This feature assists in starting the This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
engine and protects components. If the ignition key Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
is turned to the START position, and then Operate the engine and transmission gently until the
released when the engine begins cranking, the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or
until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
start and the key is held in START for many electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
seconds, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds parts or accessories, you could change the way the
to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
gear damage, this system also prevents cranking if check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
the engine is already running. Engine cranking engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
can be stopped by turning the ignition switch damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. warranty.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of

time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.

2-19
Automatic Transmission Operation
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the {CAUTION:
shift lever is located on the center console between the
front seats. It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
There are several different
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
positions for the shift lever.
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before

starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
apply your regular brakes first and then press the
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the shift lever button before you can shift from PARK (P)
best position to use when you start the engine because when the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift
your vehicle cannot move easily. out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever
and push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as
you maintain brake application. Then press the
shift lever button and move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting Out of PARK (P) on page 2-26.

2-20
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. {CAUTION:
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped. Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
At low vehicle speeds, you can also use REVERSE (R) vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
to rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
snow, ice, or sand without damaging your transmission.
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or
Snow on page 4-22 for additional information. running at high speed.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not

connect with the wheels. To restart when you are Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. You can also with the engine running at high speed may damage
use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.

2-21
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used for
provides better fuel economy for your vehicle. If you normal driving. However, it reduces the vehicle’s speed
need more power for passing, and you are: without using your brakes, for slight downgrades
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the where the vehicle would otherwise accelerate due to
steepness of grade. If constant upshifting or
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
downshifting occurs while driving on steep hills, this
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the position can be used to prevent repetitive types of shifts.
accelerator all the way down. You might choose INTERMEDIATE (I) instead of
The transmission will shift down to a lower gear DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly and winding roads.
and have more power. LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speed more
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions than INTERMEDIATE (I) without using your brakes.
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or
Control on page 4-13. mud. If the shift lever is put in LOW (L), the transmission
will not shift into low gear until the vehicle is going
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather slowly enough.
slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive your vehicle that way, you Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
could damage the transmission. Have your vehicle one place on a hill using only the accelerator
serviced right away. You can drive in LOW (L) pedal may damage the transmission. If you are
when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
and DRIVE (D) for higher speeds until then. use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
FOURTH (4): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed more than
DRIVE (D) without using your brakes. You might choose
FOURTH (4) instead of DRIVE (D) when driving on
hilly, winding roads and when going down a steep hill.

2-22
Manual Transmission Operation THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way
This is the shift pattern for you do for SECOND (2).
a manual transmission.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal.
After the vehicle stops, shift into REVERSE (R). Slowly
let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal. If it is hard to shift, let the shift lever return
to NEUTRAL and release the clutch pedal. Then press
Here is how to operate your manual transmission:
the clutch pedal again and shift into REVERSE (R).
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into Do not attempt to shift into the fifth gear position prior to
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as shifting into REVERSE (R). Your transmission has a
you press the accelerator pedal. lock out feature which prevents a fifth gear to reverse
gear shift.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a complete Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift is moving forward could damage the transmission.
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch pedal. Press The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1). Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up
on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Also, use FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R), along with the
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the parking brake, for parking your vehicle.
accelerator pedal.

2-23
Parking Brake To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
If you forget to release your parking brake, a chime will
sound and a warning message will be displayed in
the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the vehicle is
moving faster than 5 mph (8 kph). See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-41.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.

The parking brake lever is located between the

front seats.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition
is on, the brake system warning light will come on.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-27.

2-24
Shifting Into PARK (P) Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
(Automatic Transmission) Running (Automatic Transmission)

{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the engine running. Your vehicle could move
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
roll. If you have left the engine running, the PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
not move, even when you are on fairly level You or others could be injured. Do not leave
ground, use the steps that follow. your vehicle with the engine running.

1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-24 for more running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
information. parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the regular brake pedal down. If the vehicle has an
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all automatic transmission, see if you can move the shift
the way toward the front of the vehicle. lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing the shift
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF. lock release button. If you can, it means that the shift
lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

2-25
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) Shifting Out of PARK (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” in PARK (P) with the shift lever button fully released,
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the • Prevent movement of the shift lever out of PARK (P),
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into PARK (P) unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
(Automatic Transmission) on page 2-25. ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of The shift lock release is always functional except in the
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have battery.
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
of the pressure from the parking pawl in the low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
transmission, so you can pull the shift lever out of See Jump Starting on page 5-39 for more information.
PARK (P).
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.

2-26
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P), Engine Exhaust
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
{CAUTION:
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission) Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
Before leaving your manual transmission vehicle, fully
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
press the clutch pedal in, move the shift lever in
either FIRST (1) gear or REVERSE (R), and firmly apply You might have exhaust coming in if:
the parking brake. See Manual Transmission Operation • The exhaust system sounds strange or
on page 2-23. different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Parking Over Things That Burn • Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
{CAUTION: road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust • Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not been modified improperly.
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
things that can burn. your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-27
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you {CAUTION:
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not
{CAUTION: fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave your
Idling the engine with the climate control vehicle when the engine is running unless you
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into have to. If you have left the engine running,
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
Engine Exhaust on page 2-27. could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when it is on fairly level
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
ground, always set the parking brake and
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
move the automatic transmission shift lever to
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
PARK (P), or the manual transmission shift
One place this can happen is a garage.
lever to NEUTRAL.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running. Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will
not move. See Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
Transmission) on page 2-25 and Parking Your Vehicle
See Winter Driving on page 4-18. (Manual Transmission) on page 2-27.

2-28
Mirrors Outside Power Mirrors
The controls for the
Manual Rearview Mirror outside power mirrors
are located on the
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position, driver’s door.
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up
or down and side to side. The day/night adjustment
allows you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the
lamps behind you. Move the lever to the right for
nighttime use and to the left for daytime use.

Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar®

Move the selector switch, located below the four-way
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position, control pad, to the left or right to choose either the driver
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your side or passenger side mirror.
vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or
down and side to side. The day/night adjustment allows To adjust a mirror, use the arrows located on the
you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps four-way control pad to move the mirror in the desired
behind you. Move the lever to the right for nighttime use direction. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of
and to the left for daytime use. the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen
while sitting in a comfortable driving position.
There may also be three OnStar® buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror face. See your dealer/retailer for The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
more information on the system and how to subscribe to damage when going through an automatic car wash or a
OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-30 for more confined space. To fold, push the mirror toward the
information on the services OnStar® provides. vehicle. To return the mirror to its original position, push
outward. Be sure to return both mirrors to their original
unfolded position before driving.

2-29
OnStar® System A complete OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar
Terms and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or
TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button to
speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
OnStar Services
request emergency services be sent to your location. For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock one year from the date of purchase. You can extend this
your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the Directions
the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside & Connections Plan. For more information, press the
Service for you. OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar
services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the
Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available until
OnStar Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your
you register with OnStar.
OnStar service at any time by contacting OnStar.

2-30
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan OnStar Hands-Free Calling
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN) subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
(If equipped) commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
• Link to Emergency Services
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also be
• Roadside Assistance linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
• AccidentAssist Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with an
OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 complimentary
OnStar Virtual Advisor
minutes OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only) Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and
Available Services included with stock quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving
Directions & Connections Plan a few simple voice commands, you can browse
through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services Guide for more information (Only available in the
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar continental U.S.).
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services

2-31
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling. also cannot work unless you are in a place where the
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-71 for wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that area
more information. has coverage, network capacity and reception when the
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button for service is needed, and technology that is compatible
a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” to with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling. everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas, or
at all times.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone Location information about your vehicle is only available if
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and available.
information. Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
How OnStar Service Works equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability of cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
recording and transmitting vehicle information. OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
This information is automatically sent to an OnStar Some examples are damage to important parts of your
Call Center at the time of an OnStar button press, vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN weather or wireless phone network congestion.
system deploys. The vehicle information usually includes Your Responsibility
your GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the accident that your Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar
vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction from advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red,
which your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual this means that your system is not functioning properly
Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your and should be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the
vehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
can provide you with location-based services. subscription has expired. You can always press the
OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment
is active.
2-32
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open, lift the handle up. Use the key to lock and
unlock.

Cupholder(s)

Your vehicle has a cupholder on the passenger side of

the center console. To access it, press and release
the forward section of the cupholder.

Center Console Storage

There is also an upright center console storage area
between the seatbacks. To open the storage area, press
and release the button near the top so it extends out.
Then, turn the button in either direction to unlatch the lid
There are two cupholders located in the center console, and pull the console lid down. Press the release
press and release to extend forward. button back in after you close the lid.

2-33
Convertible Top Notice: Leaving the convertible top down and
exposing the interior of your vehicle to outdoor
For care and cleaning of the convertible top, see conditions may cause damage. Always close
Convertible Top on page 5-89 under “Service and the convertible top if leaving your vehicle outdoors.
Appearance Care”. High pressure car washes may
cause water to enter the vehicle. Notice: Lowering the convertible top when there
are objects in the storage area could damage
The following procedures explain the proper operation it or break the glass rear window. Always verify that
of the manual convertible top. no objects are in the storage area before lowering
The parts of the manual convertible top that are used the convertible top.
when lowering and raising it are: Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, or dirty
can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the inside
of your vehicle. Dry off the top before lowering it.
Notice: If you lower the top on your vehicle in cold
weather (0°F/-18°C or lower), you may damage top
components. Do not lower the top in cold weather.
Notice: If you raise or lower the convertible top
while the vehicle is in motion, you could damage the
top or the top mechanism. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always put an
automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manual
transmission in FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R), turn the
A. Front Edge C. Rear Buttresses ignition off and engage the parking brake before
B. Side Edge D. Trunk raising or lowering the convertible top.

2-34
 {CAUTION:
Moving parts of the convertible top can be
dangerous. People can be injured by the
convertible top and its mechanism. Keep
people away from your vehicle when you are
lowering or raising the top.

Lowering the Manual Convertible Top

1. Empty the trunk of all contents.
2. Park on a level surface and set the parking brake.
6. The convertible top front latch, located above the
Shift an automatic transmission into PARK (P).
inside rearview mirror, must be unlatched. Pull the
Shift a manual transmission into FIRST (1)
latch down and turn it counterclockwise to
or REVERSE (R).
unlatch it.
3. Make sure the ignition is turned off. Leave the latch open and turned to prevent damage.
4. Push the trunk release button located in the glove
box, or on the remote keyless entry, if equipped.
5. Lift the trunk.

2-35
 7. Pull rearward on the side edge (B) of the convertible Do not operate the rear defogger when the convertible
top and pull it off of the windshield frame. top is down.
8. Push the convertible top down into the trunk (D). A clear Mylar® protective film has been installed at the
factory on the trunk lid surface under the convertible
top buttresses. This film is designed to help prevent
paint damage to the trunk lid. Do not remove this
protective film. It is intended to remain permanently
affixed to the trunk lid surface.

Raising the Manual Convertible Top

1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake firmly
and shift an automatic transmission into PARK (P).
Shift a manual transmission into FIRST (1) or
REVERSE (R).
2. Make sure the ignition is turned off, and lower the
windows.
3. Push the trunk release button located in the glove
box, or on the remote keyless entry, if equipped.
9. After the top is stored, apply one even push, as
shown, on the convertible top to ensure that the 4. Lift the trunk.
top is fully retracted and securely stored.
10. Close the trunk (D) by pressing down from the rear
center of it with a swift, firm motion.

2-36
5. Pull the convertible top forward by firmly gripping the 9. At the rear edge of the convertible top, press down
side edge (B) and applying a brisk upward and on the two buttresses (C) to latch them into the top
forward motion to get the top in the full-up position. of the trunk.
6. Pull the front edge (A) of the convertible top forward A clear Mylar® protective film has been installed at the
from the outside of the vehicle, or push the front factory on the trunk lid surface under the convertible
edge (A) of the convertible top forward from top buttresses. This film is designed to help prevent
the inside of the vehicle. paint damage to the trunk lid. Do not remove this
7. Turn the top front latch handle clockwise to latch protective film. It is intended to remain permanently
the convertible top. affixed to the trunk lid surface.
8. Close the trunk (D) by pressing down from the rear
center of it with a swift, firm motion.

2-37
✍ NOTES

2-38
 Section 3 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4 Climate Controls ............................................3-17
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6 Climate Control System .................................3-17
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6 Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-20
Horn .............................................................3-6 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-20
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6 Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-21
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7 Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-22
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8 Tachometer .................................................3-22
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8 Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-23
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8 Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-24
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-25
Windshield Washer .......................................3-10 Charging System Light ..................................3-27
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10 Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-27
Headlamps ..................................................3-13 Antilock Brake System Warning Light ...............3-28
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-13 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-14 Traction Control System (TCS)
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-14 Indicator/Warning Light ...............................3-29
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-15 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-30
Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-15 Low Coolant Warning Light ............................3-30
Mirror Reading Lamps ...................................3-15 Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-31
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-15 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-32
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-16 Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-35
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-16 Security Light ...............................................3-35

3-1
 Section 3 Instrument Panel
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-35 Audio System(s) .............................................3-50
Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-36 Setting the Time ...........................................3-51
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-36 Radio(s) ......................................................3-54
Trunk Ajar Light ............................................3-36 Using an MP3 ..............................................3-64
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-37 XM Radio Messages .....................................3-69
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-37 Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-70
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-38 Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-71
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-38 Radio Reception ...........................................3-71
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-41 Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-72
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-45 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-72

3-2
✍ NOTES

3-3
Instrument Panel Overview

3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Side Window Outlets. See Climate Control System M. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System on
on page 3-17. page 3-17.
B. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-20. N. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. See Passenger
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-25.
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7. O. Shift Lever. See Manual Transmission Operation on
D. Cruise Control Buttons (If Equipped). See Cruise page 2-23. See Automatic Transmission Operation
Control on page 3-10. on page 2-20 (If Equipped).
E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel P. Parking Brake Lever. See Parking Brake on
Cluster on page 3-21. page 2-24.
F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped). Q. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-50.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-71. R. Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
G. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard System Button. See Electronic Stability
Warning Flashers on page 3-6. Control (ESC) on page 4-8.
H. Fog Lamp Button. See Fog Lamps on page 3-14. S. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). Accessory Power
Outlet (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette
I. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See Instrument Lighter on page 3-16 and Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Panel Brightness on page 3-15. on page 3-16.
J. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls. See Driver T. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 2-33.
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-38.
U. Trunk Release. See Trunk on page 2-8.
K. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
V. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-33.
L. Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls. See Windshield
Wipers on page 3-9 and Windshield Washer on
page 3-10.

3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers Other Warning Devices
The hazard warning flashers let you warn the police and If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
others that you have a problem. The front and rear the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
turn signal lamps will flash on and off. your vehicle.

The hazard warning

flasher button is located Horn
towards the center of To sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering
the instrument panel. wheel.

Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal before you drive. You can raise the steering wheel to
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to the highest level to give your legs more room when you
turn the flashers off. enter and exit the vehicle.
While the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
signals do not work. located on the left side of the steering column.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position the key is in, and even if the key is not in the
ignition switch.

3-6
 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering column

includes the following:
To tilt the wheel, pull down the lever. Then move the
wheel to a comfortable position, pull up the lever to lock • GTurn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and
the wheel in place. Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8.
• 53Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 3-8.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-8.
• OExterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps
on page 3-13.

3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and To change the headlamps from low beam to high
two downward (for left) positions. These positions beam, push the turn signal lever away from you.
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
When the high beams
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
are on, this light on the
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return instrument panel cluster
automatically. will also be on.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.

Flash-to-Pass
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
your lane change. The lever will return by itself when
you release it. To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows release the lever to turn them off.
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers will not see your turn signal. If a bulb is burned
out, replace it to help avoid an accident.
If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal a turn,
check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-94.

3-8
Windshield Wipers x (Delay): When the lever is in the intermittent
position, turn the intermittent adjust band with this
symbol on it up or down to set for a shorter or longer
delay between wipes. To the left of the adjust band are
bars, increasing in size from bottom to top, that
indicate the frequency of the wipes. Smaller bars mean
the wipers movement is less frequent. Larger bars
mean the movement is more frequent.
6 (Low Speed): Move the lever up to the first
setting past intermittent, for steady wiping at low speed.
1 (High Speed): Move the lever up to the second
setting past intermittent, for wiping at high speed.
Use this lever, located on the right side of the steering 8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down to this
wheel, to operate the windshield wipers. position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there until the
windshield wipers start; then let go. The windshield
9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off the wipers will stop after one wiping cycle. If you want
windshield wipers. additional wiping cycles, hold the lever down longer.
& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers): Move the Damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing well
lever to this position for intermittent or speed sensitive enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sure to clear
operation. When you select this position, the delay ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them.
will vary depending on the vehicles speed, as well as If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield,
the manually selected delay. carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do
become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

3-9
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor. Cruise Control
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload. If the With cruise control, your vehicle can maintain a speed
motor gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your
the snow or ice, and then turn the wipers back on. foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for more trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps will turn on 25 mph (40 km/h).
automatically. They will turn off 15 seconds after
the wipers are turned off.
{CAUTION:
Windshield Washer
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
To wash the windshield, press the button at the end of cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
the lever until the washers begin.
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
{CAUTION: Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
control on slippery roads.
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.

When the button is released, the washers stop, but the

wipers continue to wipe about three times or resume
the previous speed.

3-10
Setting Cruise Control RES+ (Resume): Press this button to resume a set
speed and to accelerate the speed.
SET− (Set): Press this button to set a speed and to
{CAUTION: decrease the speed.
To set a speed do the following:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button 1. Press the on/off button to turn cruise control on.
The indicator light on the button will come on.
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control. 2. Get to the speed desired.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you 3. Press the SET− control button and release it.
want to use cruise control. The CRUISE ENGAGED message will appear
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) to show the
system is on.
The cruise control buttons 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
are located on the left side
of the steering wheel.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. To return to your
previously set speed, you do not need to go through the
set process again. Once you are going about 16 mph
(26 km/h) or more, you can press the RES+ button briefly.
This will take you back up to your previously chosen
speed and stay there.
J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruise control
system on and off. The LED indicator light will turn on
and off when this button is pressed.

3-11
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Control Cruise Control
There are two ways to increase speed. Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed.
1. Disengage the cruise control by applying the brake When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will
pedal, but do not turn it off. Accelerate to a higher slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
speed and reset the cruise control. Using Cruise Control on Hills
2. If the cruise control system is already engaged, How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
press the RES+ button. Press it until you get up the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the
to the speed desired, and then release the button. hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step
To increase the speed in very small amounts, on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle
press the RES+ button briefly and then release it. speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake
Each time you do this, the vehicle will go about or shift to a lower gear to reduce the vehicle speed.
1.25 mph (2 km/h) faster. Of course, applying the brake turns off the cruise control.
Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and do
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise not use cruise control on steep hills.
Control
If the cruise control system is already on,
Ending Cruise Control
To end cruise control, step lightly on the brake pedal or
• Push and hold the SET− part of the button until you the clutch pedal.
reach the lower speed desired, then release it.
Stepping on the brake pedal or clutch pedal will only
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the end the current cruise control session. Press the cruise
SET− part of the button briefly. Each time this control on/off button to turn the system completely off.
is done, the vehicle will go about 1.25 mph (2 km/h)
slower. Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
the cruise control set speed memory is erased.

3-12
Headlamps P (Off/On): This position is an Off/On switch for the
Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada, this applies
to vehicles with an automatic transmission set to
PARK (P) and manual transmission vehicles with the
parking brake engaged.
When operating in AUTO, a brief turn of the switch to
off/on will turn off the Automatic Headlamp System.
An AUTO LIGHTS OFF message will display on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) and a chime will
sound. Turning the switch to off/on again will turn
the Automatic Headlamp System back on. An AUTO
LIGHTS ON message will display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
The lever on the left side of the steering column The Automatic Headlamp System is always turned on
operates the exterior lamps. at the beginning of an ignition cycle for vehicles
with manual transmission. When the parking brake is
The exterior lamp switch has the following four positions: engaged, the automatic headlamps will turn off.
2 (Headlamps): This position turns on the For vehicles with an automatic transmission, when the
headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps. shift lever is shifted out of PARK (P), the Automatic
Headlamp System will turn on. Shifting the lever back to
; (Parking Lamps): This position turns on the PARK (P) will turn off the automatic headlamp system.
parking lamps and taillamps only.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): This position Headlamps on Reminder
automatically turns on the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) during daytime, and the headlamps, parking If the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off and
lamps, and taillamps at night. the lamps on, a warning chime will sound. This lets you
know that the headlamps are still on.

3-13
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) For vehicles first sold in Canada the DRL system will
turn off when a automatic transmission vehicle is in the
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for PARK (P) position or the park brake is set on a
others to see the front of your vehicle during the manual transmission vehicle and the vehicle speed is
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving less than 8 mph (13 km/h).
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles headlamp system when it is needed.
first sold in Canada.
Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument Fog Lamps
panel that helps control the DRL. Make sure it is not
The fog lamp button is
covered or the headlamps will come on when they are
located on the instrument
not needed.
panel, to the left of the
The DRL system makes both low beam headlamps turn steering wheel.
on at reduced intensity when the following conditions
are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO.
• The light sensor detects daytime light. The ignition must be on to turn the fog lamps on.
• The shift lever is not in PARK (P). Push the button to turn the fog lamps on and off.
An indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will
While the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker come on when the fog lamps are on.
lamps, and instrument panel lights will not be on.
The parking lamps will automatically turn on and off
The DRL system turns off on U.S. vehicles by using the when the fog lamps are turned on and off.
on/off switch for one ignition cycle, if the vehicle is in
the PARK (P) position, or if the vehicle speed is
less than 5 mph (8 km/h) after the vehicle is started.

3-14
The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beam Mirror Reading Lamps
headlamps are turned on.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to Your vehicle has reading lamps on the rearview
be on along with the fog lamps. mirror. Push the button to turn the reading lamps
on and off.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Battery Run-Down Protection
The control for this feature is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering wheel. Your vehicle has a battery saver feature designed to
protect the vehicle’s battery.
Turn the thumbwheel up to brighten the lights or down
to dim them. When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown protection system
automatically turns the lamp off after 20 minutes.
Entry/Exit Lighting This prevents draining of the battery.
The lamps inside your vehicle will go on when you open
any door. These lamps will fade out after about
20 seconds after all of the doors have been closed or
when the ignition is turned on. These lamps will also go
on when you press the trunk release, unlock symbol
button or the horn symbol on the Remote Keyless Entry
System (RKE) Transmitter.
The lamps inside the vehicle will stay on for about
20 seconds after the key is removed from the ignition to
provide an illuminated exit.

3-15
Accessory Power Outlet(s) When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
The accessory power outlet can be used to connect
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
CB radio.
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
The accessory power outlet is located on the instrument from the plug because the power outlets are
panel, to the right of the radio. designed for accessory power plugs only.
To use the outlet, remove the cover. When not in use,
always cover the outlet with the protective cap. Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for Your vehicle may have a removable muffin tin ashtray
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off and cigarette lighter. The muffin tin ashtray can be
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied placed into the front console side cupholder. To use the
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment lighter, located on the instrument panel to the left
when not in use and do not plug in equipment side of the glove box door, push it in all the way and let
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating. go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
with the accessory power outlet and could result
heating does not let the lighter back away from the
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
heating element when it is hot. Damage from
problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
information on the accessory power outlet.
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes. smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
electrical equipment. the ashtray.

3-16
Climate Controls #(Air Conditioning): Press the left knob on the
control panel to turn the air conditioning system
on or off. An indicator light on the button comes on
Climate Control System to show that the air conditioning is activated.
When the system is on, this setting cools and
dehumidifies the air entering the vehicle.
The air conditioning will not function if the fan is turned
off. If air conditioning is selected with fan off, the
indicator light flashes three times and then turns off.
There could be a slight change in engine performance
when the air conditioning compressor turns off and turns
on again. This is normal. The system is designed to
make adjustments to help with fuel economy while still
maintaining the selected temperature.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
The heating, cooling, and ventilation of the vehicle can air, so a small amount of water can drip underneath
be controlled with this system. Set the control your vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
between modes to get a combination of the two modes. This is normal.

Temperature: Turn the left knob on the control panel Air conditioning does not operate at temperature
to adjust the temperature of the air in the vehicle. below 40°F (4°C). In temperatures above 40°F (4°C),
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase the air conditioning cannot be turned off in defrost,
or decrease the temperature. floor/defog, and recirculation modes because it helps to
remove moisture from the vehicle. It also helps to
keep the windows clear.

3-17
On hot days, open the windows to let the hot inside air Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or
escape; then close them. This helps reduce the time off. An indicator light on the button comes on while the
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps recirculation mode is activated.
the system to operate more efficiently.
Recirculation is available in the bi-level and vent modes.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following: If recirculation is selected in either floor/heat, floor/defog,
1. Select the vent mode. or defrost mode, the indicator light flashes three times
indicating it is not available in that mode.
2. Select recirculation mode.
The right knob on the control panel is used to direct the
3. Select the air conditioning to on.
airflow inside the vehicle. Turn the knob to select one
4. Select the coolest temperature. of the following modes:
5. Select the highest fan speed.
H(Vent): Turn the right knob on the control panel to
Using these settings together for long periods of time this mode to direct air to the instrument panel outlets.
can cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry.
To prevent this from happening, after the air in the vehicle \ (Bi-Level): Turn the right knob on the control panel
has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off. to this mode to direct air to the instrument panel, floor,
9(Fan): Turn the center knob on the control panel to defroster and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed
to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
control the fan speed. Turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. [(Floor): Turn the right knob on the control panel to
9(Off): Turn the center knob to this position to turn this mode to direct most of the air to the floor outlets.
the fan off. The remaining air is directed to the side window
and defroster outlets. If low or no airflow is on the
?(Recirculation): Press the center knob on the passenger side, make sure that the carpet covering is
control panel to recirculate air inside the vehicle tucked under floor outlets.
and prevent outside air from coming in. It can be used
to prevent outside odors from entering the vehicle
and cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly.

3-18
Defogging and Defrosting Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. remove fog or frost from the rear window. Be sure to
This can be minimized if the climate control system is clear as much snow from the rear window as possible.
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost An indicator light on the knob comes on while the
from your windshield and side windows. Use the defog rear window defogger is activated. The rear window
mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm defogger turns off about fifteen minutes after the knob is
the passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or pressed. If turned on again, the defogger will run for
frost from the windshield more quickly. For best results, about seven and one-half minutes before turning off.
clear all snow and ice from the windshield before If vehicle speed is greater than 50 mph (80 kph) and the
defrosting. Use a temperature setting that provides warm rear defogger is active, it will remain on as long as
air. The warmer the air the quicker the windows clear. the speed is greater than 50 mph (80 kph). The defogger
To prevent fogging on the inside of the windows in can also be turned off by pressing the knob again or
modes other than floor/defog and defrost, make sure by turning off the engine.
the air conditioning compressor is on and recirculation Do not use the rear defogger when the convertible top
mode is off. is down.
/(Floor/Defog): Turn the right knob on the control =(Rear Defogger): Press the right knob on the
panel to this mode to direct the air to the windshield, the control panel to turn the rear window defogger on or off.
side window outlets, and to the floor outlets. When this Do not use the rear defogger when the convertible
mode is selected, the system runs the air conditioning top is down.
compressor unless the outside temperature is near
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
freezing or below.
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
0(Defrost): Turn the right knob on the control panel to the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
this mode to direct most of the air to the windshield, and covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
the side window outlets. When this mode is selected, the vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
system runs the air conditioning compressor unless the to the defogger grid.
outside temperature is near or below freezing.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

3-19
Outlet Adjustment Warning Lights, Gages, and
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side Indicators
of your instrument panel to direct the airflow.
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
Use the tab located on the air outlets to change the your vehicle.
direction of the airflow.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
Your vehicle has flow through ventilation that allows wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
outside air to be forced through your ventilation system an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
when your vehicle is moving. Outside air will enter the warning lights and gages could also save you or
the vehicle when the air conditioning fan is running. others from injury.
Flow through ventilation can be stopped in vent
and bi-level modes by pressing the recirculation button. Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As the
Operation Tips details show on the next few pages, some warning lights
come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air know they are working. If you are familiar with this
inlets at the base of the windshield that may section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
• Use of non-Saturn approved hood deflectors may with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
adversely affect the performance of the system. and warning lights work together to let you know when
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects there is a problem with your vehicle.
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
effectively. as you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even
dangerous. So get to know your vehicle’s warning lights
and gages. They can be a big help.

3-20
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know
how fast you are going, about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things you will need to drive safely
and economically.

United States Base Cluster shown, Canada and Uplevel similar

3-21
Speedometer and Odometer Tachometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). per minute (rpm).
The vehicle’s odometer works together with the Driver Notice: If you operate the engine with the
Information Center (DIC). A Trip A and Trip B odometer tachometer in the shaded warning area,
can be set. See “Trip Information” under DIC Operation your vehicle could be damaged, and the damages
and Displays on page 3-38. would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
The odometer mileage can be checked without the operate the engine with the tachometer in the
vehicle running. Open the driver’s door and the mileage shaded warning area.
will be displayed briefly.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.

3-22
Safety Belt Reminders Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
Safety Belt Reminder Light will sound for several seconds to remind the front
When the engine is started, a chime will come on for passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled. Sensing System on page 1-43 for more information.
The passenger safety belt light, located on the
The safety belt light will instrument panel, will come on and stay on for
also come on and stay on several seconds and then flash for several more.
for several seconds,
then it will flash for This chime and light are
several more. repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.

This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains

unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will
come on. If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.

3-23
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument {CAUTION:
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
problem. The system check includes the airbag may not be working properly. The airbags in
sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag could even inflate without a crash. To help
System on page 1-36. avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
This light will come on readiness light stays on after you start your
when you start your vehicle.
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. The light
should go out and the The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds
system is ready. when you start the engine. If the light does not come on
then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a problem with
the airbag system, an airbag Driver Information Center
(DIC) message may also come on. See DIC Warnings
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start and Messages on page 3-41 for more information.
the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.

3-24
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system. passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
United States Canada rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator will to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to child restraint in the right front passenger’s
let you know the status of the right front passenger’s seat if the airbag is turned on.
frontal airbag.

3-25
 If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
{CAUTION: a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a {CAUTION:
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
airbag will not deploy under some unusual panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
circumstance, even though it is turned off. it means that something may be wrong with
We recommend that rear-facing child the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
restraints be secured in the rear seat, the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
even if the airbag is off. adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing on page 3-24 for more on this, including
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal important safety information.
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-43
for more on this, including important safety information.

3-26
Charging System Light Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
This light will come on
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
briefly when you turn on
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
the ignition, but the engine
you need both parts working well.
is not running, as a
check to show you it If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
is working. Have your brake system inspected right away.

It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays

on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. A charging system
Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also
appear. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-41
for more information. This light could indicate that you United States Canada
have problems with a generator drive belt, or another
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. This light should come on briefly when the engine is
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be started. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
and air conditioner.

3-27
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light Antilock Brake System
will also come on when you set the parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does Warning Light
not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake
is fully released, it means you have a brake problem. For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off (ABS), this light will come
the road and stop carefully. Make sure the parking brake on briefly when you
is fully released. You may notice that the pedal is start the engine.
harder to push or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have
the vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-28.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem.
{CAUTION:
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it is
Your brake system may not be working safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start
properly if the brake system warning light is the engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light
on. Driving with the brake system warning light still stays on, or comes on again while you are driving,
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
on after you have pulled off the road and warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system
for service. warning light is also on, you do not have antilock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-27.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-41 for all
brake related DIC messages.

3-28
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/ If this light is on and not flashing, the TCS and
potentially the ESC system have been disabled. Check
Traction Control System (TCS) your DIC messaging to determine which feature(s) is
no longer functioning and whether it is because of
Indicator/Warning Light the driver turning off the feature(s), or the system may
not be working properly and your vehicle requires
This light is located in the service. If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin will not be
center of the instrument limited. If the ESC system is disabled, the system
panel cluster. will not aid in maintaining vehicle directional control.
In either case, adjust your driving accordingly.
If the light is on and flashing, the TCS or the ESC
system is actively working. Check the DIC messaging
for details to determine which system is working.
If the LOW TRACTION message appears, the system is
For vehicles that have the Electronic Stability Control limiting wheel spin. If the ESC ACTIVE message
(ESC) system or the Traction Control System (TCS), appears, the system is aiding in maintaining vehicle
this warning light should come on briefly when the directional control.
engine is started.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-8 and
If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 for more
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. information.
This light, along with the appropriate Driver Information
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-41 for
Center (DIC) messages, indicates when the ESC
more information on the messages associated with
system and the TCS are working or are disabled.
this light.

3-29
Engine Coolant Temperature Low Coolant Warning Light
Warning Light This light comes on briefly
when you turn your
The engine coolant ignition on.
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine has overheated.

If this light comes on and stays on, the coolant level in

your vehicle is low. If the light is on you may have a
If this happens you should pull over and turn off the serious overheating problem.
engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-26 for more information. Notice: Driving with the low coolant warning light
on could cause your vehicle to overheat. See
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature “Engine Overheating” under Engine Coolant on
warning light on could cause your vehicle to page 5-24. Your vehicle could be damaged and the
overheat. See Engine Overheating on page 5-26. damages might not be covered by your warranty.
Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not be
covered by your warranty. Never drive with the See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for more information.
engine coolant temperature warning light on. Your vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible.
This light will also come on briefly when starting your
vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.

3-30
Tire Pressure Light When the Light is Solid
This indicates that one or more of your tires are
Your vehicle has a tire significantly underinflated.
pressure light.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-41 for more
information. Stop and check your tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
pressure. See Tires on page 5-50 for more information.

This light comes on briefly when the engine is started When the Light Flashes First and
and provides information about tire pressures and Then is Solid
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
This indicates that there may be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light will flash
for about a minute and then stay on solid for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. This sequence will repeat
with every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 5-58 for more information.

3-31
Malfunction Indicator Lamp Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
Check Engine Light might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of that might not be covered by your warranty.
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
environment.
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
The check engine light Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
comes on to indicate that controls and can cause this light to come on.
there is an OBD II Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
problem and service is repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
required. also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3.

Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before

any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.

3-32
This light comes on, as a check to show it is working, If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN but the engine is stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
not running. If the light does not come on, have it Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
repaired. This light also comes on during a malfunction the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
in one of two ways: Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control system on your If the Light Is On Steady
vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required.
You might be able to correct the emission system
• Light On Steady — An emission control system malfunction by considering the following:
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required. Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
If the Light is Flashing install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
The following can prevent more serious damage to
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
your vehicle:
fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
• Reduce vehicle speed. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
• Avoid hard accelerations. turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.

3-33
Have you recently changed brands of fuel? Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. Programs
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. Some state/provincial and local governments have or
You might notice this as stalling after start-up, might begin programs to inspect the emission control
stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
acceleration — these conditions might go away once registration.
the engine is warmed up. This will be detected by Here are some things you need to know to help your
the system and cause the light to turn on. vehicle pass an inspection:
If you experience one or more of these conditions, Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least engine light is on or not working properly.
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
If none of the above steps have made the light (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
turn off, your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. emission control systems have not been completely
Your dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
problems that might have developed. if you have recently replaced the battery or if the battery
has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This can take several days of routine driving.
If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your
dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.

3-34
Oil Pressure Light Security Light
For information regarding
{CAUTION: this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. on page 2-12.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.

Fog Lamp Light

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be The fog lamp light will
covered by your warranty. Always follow the come on when the fog
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing lamps are in use.
engine oil.
This light will come on
briefly when you start your
engine. If it does not,
have your vehicle serviced.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-14 for more information.

When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
is not flowing through your engine properly. You could
be low on oil and you might have some other system
problem.
3-35
Reduced Engine Power Light Highbeam On Light
This light will come on This light comes on when
briefly when you start the the high-beam headlamps
engine. are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8

This light, along with the service engine soon light will for more information.
be displayed when a noticeable reduction in the
vehicle’s performance may occur. Stop the vehicle and
turn off the ignition. Wait for 10 seconds and restart
Trunk Ajar Light
your vehicle. This may correct the condition. This light will come on
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed when briefly when the engine
the reduced engine power light is on but acceleration is started.
and speed may be reduced. The performance may
be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle.
If this light stays on, see your dealer/retailer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair.

This light will also come on and a chime will sound if

the trunk is ajar. There will also be a TRUNK AJAR
message in your Driver Information Center (DIC). For
more information see DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-41. Do not drive with the trunk ajar.

3-36
Fuel Gage • The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
Your fuel gage tells you • The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
about how much fuel you
off the ignition.
have left.
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-99.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light, below the
fuel gage, will come on
briefly when the engine
is started.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
This light also comes on when the fuel tank is low on
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel. When you add fuel the light should go off. If it does
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have not, have your vehicle serviced.
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.

3-37
Driver Information Center (DIC) DIC Operation and Displays
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC). The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has
The DIC display gives you the status of many of your different modes which can be accessed by pressing
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display driver the DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in
personalization menu modes and warning/status the following.
messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display,
located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster. Information Modes
The DIC buttons are INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
located on the left side of the following vehicle information modes:
the steering wheel.
Outside Air Temperature and Odometer
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature and the odometer display. This mode shows
the temperature outside of the vehicle in either degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C) and the total
distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km). The outside air temperature appears
on the left side of the DIC display and the odometer
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through appears on the right side of the display.
the vehicle information mode displays.
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
r(Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle see “UNITS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on
information mode displays, select a personalization menu page 3-45.
mode setting, or acknowledge a warning message.
Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the
same time for one second, then release the buttons
to enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-45 for more information.

3-38
TRIP A or TRIP B MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)
Press the information button until TRIP A or TRIP B Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM)
display. These modes show the current distance AVG displays. This mode shows how many miles per
traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both odometers can vehicle is getting based on current and past driving
be used at the same time. conditions.
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold the
reset button for a few seconds while the desired reset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed.
trip odometer is displayed. Average fuel economy is then calculated starting
from that point. If the average fuel economy is not reset,
FUEL RANGE it is continually updated each time you drive.
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE
displays. This mode shows the remaining distance you
MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)
can drive without refueling in either miles (mi) or Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INST
kilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy and the displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy
fuel remaining in the tank. at a particular moment and changes frequently as
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW displays. driving conditions change. This mode shows the
instantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average
is an average of recent driving conditions. As your fuel economy, this screen cannot be reset.
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.

3-39
AV (Average) SPEED COOLANT
Press the information button until AV SPEED displays. Press the information button until COOLANT displays.
This mode shows the vehicle’s average speed in This mode shows the temperature of the engine coolant
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold the Tire Pressure
reset button while AV SPEED is displayed.
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.
OIL LIFE The tire pressure is shown in either pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the information
Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays.
button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF displays for the
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’s
front tires. Press the information button again until
remaining useful life. It shows 100% when the system
LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for the rear tires.
is reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oil
on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions. If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the system
while driving, a message advising you to check the tire
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
pressure appears in the display. See Inflation - Tire
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
Pressure on page 5-56 and DIC Warnings and Messages
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
on page 3-41 for more information.
Oil on page 5-15 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4. BOOST (Turbo Only)
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil If your vehicle has this feature, press the information
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System” button until BOOST displays. This mode shows a
under Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19. graphic that indicates the amount of boost the engine
is receiving in either pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa).

3-40
DIC Warnings and Messages CHANGE OIL SOON
These messages appear if there is a problem detected This message displays when the life of the engine oil
in one of your vehicle’s systems. has expired and it should be changed.
A message clears when the vehicle’s condition is no When this message is acknowledged and cleared from
longer present. To acknowledge a message and clear it the display, the engine oil life system must still be
from the display, press and hold any of the DIC buttons. reset separately. See Engine Oil Life System on
If the condition is still present, the warning message page 5-19 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
comes back on the next time the vehicle is turned for more information.
off and back on. With most messages, a warning chime
sounds when the message displays. Your vehicle
CHECK GAS CAP
may have other warning messages. This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully
tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure that it
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF is on properly. A few driving trips with the cap properly
This message displays if the automatic headlamp installed should turn the message off.
system is disabled with the headlamp switch.
CHECK TIRE PRESS (Pressure)
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON This message displays when the pressure in one or
This message displays if the automatic headlamp more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. If a tire
system is enabled with the headlamp switch. pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon
as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to
BRAKE FLUID those shown on the Tire Loading Information label.
See Tires on page 5-50, Loading Your Vehicle on
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when
page 4-23, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56.
the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See
light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on.
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-38. If the tire
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-27 for more
pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light
information. Have the brake system serviced by your
comes on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-31.
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.

3-41
COMPETITIVE MODE ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
when the Competitive Driving mode is selected. this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on
The Traction Control System (TCS) will not be operating the instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC is
while in the Competitive Driving mode and the assisting you with directional control of the vehicle.
ESC/TCS light on the instrument panel cluster will be on You may feel or hear the system working and see this
solid. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Electronic message displayed in the DIC. Slippery road conditions
Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-8, Electronic Stability may exist when this message is displayed, so adjust
Control (ESC) on page 4-8, and Electronic Stability your driving accordingly. This message may stay on for
Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) a few seconds after ESC stops assisting you with
Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-29 for more directional control of the vehicle. This is normal when
information. the system is operating. See Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) on page 4-8 and Electronic Stability Control
CRUISE ENGAGED (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
This message displays when the cruise control system Light on page 3-29 for more information.
is active. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more
information.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) NOT
READY
DOOR AJAR If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
This message displays if one or more of the vehicle’s this message may display briefly after starting the
doors are not closed properly. Make sure that the vehicle if the system’s sensors are not yet calibrated.
door(s) are closed completely. The system is not functional until the message
stops displaying. Adjust your driving accordingly.
ENGINE DISABLED When the message is no longer displayed, the system
This message displays if the starting of the engine is is functional. See Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your on page 4-8 for more information.
dealer/retailer immediately.

3-42
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF LOW COOLANT
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC), This message displays when there is a low level of
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on engine coolant. Have the cooling system serviced by
the instrument panel cluster comes on solid when your dealer/retailer as soon as possible. See Engine
ESC is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. Coolant on page 5-24 for more information.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-8
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control LOW TRACTION
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-29 If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
for more information. this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on
the instrument panel cluster flashes when the system is
ICE POSSIBLE actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions
This message displays when the outside air temperature may exist if this message is displayed, so adjust
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly. This message stays on for a
your driving accordingly. few seconds after the system stops limiting wheel spin.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 and
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
This message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-29
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery in for more information.
the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
PARKING BRAKE
page 2-4. This message displays if the parking brake is left
engaged. See Parking Brake on page 2-24 for more
information.

3-43
SERVICE AIR BAG SERVICE TRACTION
This message displays when there is a problem with the If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your this message displays and a chime sounds when
dealer/retailer immediately. the system is not functioning properly. The ESC/TCS
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster.
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY This light stays on solid as long as the detected problem
CONTROL) remains present. When this message displays, the
system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC), See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6
this message displays and a chime sounds if there has and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
been a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-29
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster. for more information. Have the TCS serviced by
This light stays on solid as long as the detected problem your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
remains present. When this message displays, the
system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly. SVC (Service) BRAKE SYSTEM
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-8
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control This message may display if you have a turbocharged
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-29 vehicle with Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and if
for more information. the hydraulic brake boost is not working or is working
improperly. Have the brake system serviced by your
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and
then back on. If this message still stays on or turns back
on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs
service. Have the ESC inspected by your dealer/retailer
as soon as possible.

3-44
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR DIC Vehicle Personalization
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire you to program certain features to a preferred setting.
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during All of the features listed may not be available on
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on your vehicle. Only the features available will be
page 3-31. Several conditions may cause this message displayed on the DIC.
to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on The default settings for the features were set when your
page 5-59 for more information. If the warning comes on vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. from their default state since that time.
See your dealer/retailer.
To change feature settings, use the following procedure:
TRACTION OFF
Entering Personalization Menu
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on 1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.
the instrument panel cluster comes on solid when the To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
TCS is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 and 2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control the same time for one second, then release to enter
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-29 the personalization menu.
for more information.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h),
TRUNK AJAR only the UNITS menu will be accessible.

This message displays when the trunk is not closed 3. Press the information button to scroll through the
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed available personalization menu modes.
completely. See Trunk on page 2-8 and Trunk Ajar Press the reset button to scroll through the available
Light on page 3-36 for more information. settings for each mode.
If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,
the display will go back to the previous information
displayed.

3-45
Personalization Menu Modes LOCK HORN
OIL LIFE RESET This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp
every time the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the engine (RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or
oil life system. To reset the system, see Engine Oil Life disabled. When LOCK HORN appears on the display,
System on page 5-19. See “OIL LIFE” under DIC press and hold the reset button for at least one second
Operation and Displays on page 3-38 for more to scroll through the available settings:
information.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press
UNITS of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The horn
will still chirp on the second press.
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the lock
information. When UNITS appears on the display, press button on the RKE transmitter.
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings: See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2-4 for more information.
ENGLISH (default in United States): All information To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
will be displayed in English units. press the information button while the desired setting is
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be displayed on the DIC.
displayed in metric units.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.

3-46
UNLOCK HORN LIGHT FLASH
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp on This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior
the first press of the unlock button on the Remote hazard/turn signal lighting to flash every time the lock,
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, can be enabled or unlock, or trunk release buttons on the Remote Keyless
disabled. When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display, Entry (RKE) transmitter are pressed, can be enabled
press and hold the reset button for at least one second or disabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears on the
to scroll through the available settings: display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed. OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will
not flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock on the RKE transmitter are pressed.
button on the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2-4 for more information. will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons
on the RKE transmitter are pressed.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
press the information button while the desired setting is
page 2-4 for more information.
displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.

3-47
AUTO UNLK (Unlock) UNLK (Unlock)
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically (Automatic Transmission Only)
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. This screen displays only if your vehicle has an
When AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and automatic transmission and DRIVER or ALL is selected
hold the reset button for at least one second to for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines
scroll through the available settings: when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When
UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.
button for at least one second to scroll through the
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically unlock. available settings:

NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock. KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key is
You will need to manually unlock the doors. turned off.

If you have a manual transmission vehicle, the door(s) SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlock
will automatically unlock when the key is turned off. when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
If you have an automatic transmission vehicle, you can See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock on page 2-7
select when the automatic unlocking will occur. for more information.
See “UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transmission Only)” To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
following. press the information button while the desired setting is
See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock on page 2-7 displayed on the DIC.
for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.

3-48
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS LANGUAGE
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior This feature allows you to select the language in which
perimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlock button the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears on
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is the display, press and hold the reset button for at least
pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When EXT one second to scroll through the available settings:
LIGHTS appears on the display, press and hold the
reset button for at least one second to scroll through ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
the available settings: English.

OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.
pressed.
GERMAN: All messages will appear in German.
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn
on when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter To select a setting and exit out of the personalization
is pressed. menu mode, press the information button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2-4 for more information. Exiting Personalization Menu
To select a setting and move on to the next feature, The personalization menu will be exited when any of the
press the information button while the desired setting is following conditions occur:
displayed on the DIC.
• A ten second time period has elapsed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The end of the personalization menu list is reached.

3-49
Audio System(s) While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the • Familiarize yourself with its operation.
pages following to familiarize yourself with its features.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
{CAUTION: conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
This system provides you with far greater controls if the vehicle has them.
access to audio stations and song listings. Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
Giving extended attention to entertainment your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio,
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep make sure that it can be added by checking with
your eyes on the road and your mind on the your dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching covering mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
while driving. equipment can be added, it is very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe radio, or other systems, and even damage them.
driving. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2. Here Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction operation of sound equipment that has been added.
while driving. Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-18 for more
information.

3-50
Setting the Time 3. While either the hour or the minute numbers are
flashing, turn the f (tune) knob, located on the
Without Date Display upper right side of the radio, clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the time.
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single CD Player
4. Press the H button again until the clock display
This type of radio has a H (clock) button for setting the stops flashing to set the currently displayed time;
time. You can set the time by following these steps: otherwise, the flashing stops after five seconds and
the current time displayed is automatically set.
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN. Press the O(power) knob, located in To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
the center of the radio, to turn the radio on. 24 hour, press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow label. Once the
2. Press the H button until the hour begins flashing time 12H and 24H are displayed, press the pushbutton
on the display. Press the H button a second time located under the desired option to select the default.
and the minute begins flashing on the display. Press the H button again to apply the selected default,
or let the screen time out.

3-51
With Date Display The date does not automatically display. To see the
date press the H button while the radio is on. The date
Single CD (MP3) Player with display times out after a few seconds and goes
back to the normal radio and time display.
This type of radio has a H button for setting the time
and date. Six-Disc CD (MP3) Player
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
This type of radio has a MENU button instead of
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY the H button to set the time and date.
or ON/RUN. Press the Oknob, located in the
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
center of the radio, to turn the radio on.
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY
2. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD,
or ON/RUN. Press the Oknob, located in the
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)
center of the radio, to turn the radio on.
displays.
2. Press the MENU button. Once the clock option is
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
displayed.
labels that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if 3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.
selected, increases by one. The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to
press the right ¨SEEK arrow or \FWD
button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the
left ©SEEK arrow or sREV button, or turn
the f knob, located on the upper right side of
the radio.

3-52
 4. Press the pushbutton located under any one of To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
the labels you want to change. Every time the 24 hour or to change the date default setting from
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these
selected, increases by one. instructions:
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to 1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton located
press the right ¨SEEK arrow or \FWD under the forward arrow label. Once the time 12H
button. and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day,
and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)
• To decrease the time or date, press the displays.
left ©SEEK arrow or sREV button, or turn 2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
the f knob, located on the upper right side of option.
the radio.
3. Press the H or MENU button again to apply the
The date does not automatically display. To see the selected default, or let the screen time out.
date press the MENU button and then the H button
while the radio is on. The date with display times
out after a few seconds and goes back to the normal
radio and time display.

3-53
Radio(s)

Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with

Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar
Radio with CD (Base)
Radio Data System (RDS)
Your radio may have a Radio Data System (RDS).
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies
upon receiving specific information from these stations
and only works when the information is available.
While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the
station name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio
station can broadcast incorrect information that causes
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.

3-54
Playing the Radio Finding a Station
O(Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1 and
system on and off. FM2, AM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selection displays.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
or decrease the volume. ©SEEK ¨: Press the arrows to go to the previous or
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with the to the next station and stay there.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) feature will To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a
automatically adjust the radio volume to compensate for few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
road and wind noise as the vehicle’s speed changes station, plays for a few seconds, then goes on to the next
while driving, so that the volume level is consistent. station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
To activate SCV:
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level. signal that are in the selected band.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio 4 (Information) (Radio with CD (Base)): Press to
setup menu. switch the display between the radio station frequency
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM and the time. While the ignition is off, press this button to
(automatic volume) label on the radio display. display the time.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed 4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3,
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med, and RDS Features): Press to display additional text
or High) to select the level of radio volume information related to the current FM-RDS or XM™
compensation. The display times out after station, or MP3 song. A choice of additional information
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) can
allows for more radio volume compensation at faster display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired label,
vehicle speeds. or press the pushbutton positioned under any one of the
labels and the information about that label displays.
While information is not available, No Info displays.

3-55
Setting Preset Stations Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages of
favorites, each having six favorite stations available
(Radio with CD (Base)) per page. Each page of favorites can contain any
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform the
by performing the following steps: following steps:
1. Turn the radio on. 1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM. 2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
3. Tune in the desired station. you want the station stored.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered 3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep sounds. beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
When that pushbutton is pressed and released, and released, the station that was set, returns.
the station that was set, returns.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton. 4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
you want stored as a favorite.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
pages, perform the following steps:
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and 1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has this feature. setup menu.
See Defensive Driving on page 4-2. 2. Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be through 6 label.
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency labels and
by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).

3-56
 3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble)
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers. BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob
return to the original main radio screen showing the until the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to
radio station frequency labels and to begin the highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
process of programming your favorites for the positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob
chosen amount of numbered pages. clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. The highlighted setting can be adjusted by
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) pressing either SEEK arrow, \FWD (forward), or
(Radio with CD (Base)) sREV (reverse) button until the desired levels
are obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak, or has
BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bass or
static, decrease the treble.
treble, press the f knob or the BASS/TREBLE
pushbutton until the desired tone control label displays. To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
Turn the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise to position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
increase or decrease the setting. The current bass or
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
treble level displays. If a station’s frequency is weak, or
position.
has static, decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
EQ (Equalization): Press to adjust BASS and TREBLE
middle position, press the f knob for more than
Settings.
two seconds until a beep sounds.
EQ (Equalization): Press to select preset equalization
settings.
To return to the manual mode, press until Manual
displays or start to manually adjust the bass, midrange,
or treble by pressing the f knob.

3-57
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(Radio with CD (Base)) CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find
` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance XM™ stations while the radio is in the XM™ mode.
To find XM™ channels within a desired category,
or fade, press this button or the f knob until the perform the following:
desired speaker control label displays. Turn the f knob
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™ frequency is
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the setting.
displayed. Press the CAT button to display the
category labels on the radio display. Continue
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) pressing the CAT button until the desired category
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or name displays.
fade, press the f knob until the speaker control labels 2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired category label to immediately tune to the first
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the XM™ station associated with that category.
desired label. Turn the f knob clockwise or 3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons below the
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. right or left arrows displayed, or press the
The highlighted setting can be adjusted by pressing SEEK arrows to go to the previous or to the next
either SEEK arrow, \FWD, or sREV button until XM™ station within the selected category.
the desired levels are obtained. 4. To exit the category search mode, press the
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position, FAV button or BAND button to display your
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or favorites again.
FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds
and the level adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.

3-58
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed through Radio Messages
the setup menu. To remove an undesired category,
perform the following: Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
setup menu. configured properly for your vehicle and it must
2. Press the pushbutton located below the be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
XM CAT label. Loc or Locked: This message displays when the
3. Turn the f knob to display the category you THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
want removed.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
label until the category name along with the word
Removed displays. XM™ Satellite Radio Service
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories. XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed provinces. XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of
category displays or by pressing the pushbutton under programming and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast,
the Restore All label. and in digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM™ Radio
Categories cannot be removed or added while the Online for when you are not in your vehicle. A service fee
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). is required to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or
call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Radio Messages for XM Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-69 later in this
section for further detail.

3-59
Playing a CD (Single CD Player) If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. if it was the last selected audio source.

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player) When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays on

the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into the CD number displays.
player. This CD player holds up to six CDs. The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
To insert one CD, do the following: single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
1. Press and release the ^ button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc. Care of Your CDs
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
label side up. The player pulls the CD in. due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
To insert multiple CDs, do the following: CD-R has been handled. Handle them carefully.
1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds. Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or other protective
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays. cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD
player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs. or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
more CDs. handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole
and the outer edge.

3-60
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free ZEJECT: Press to eject CD(s). To eject the CD
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral that is currently playing, press and release this button.
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD
the edge. can be removed. If the CD is not removed after
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD. several seconds, the CD automatically pulls back into
the player and begins playing.
Care of Your CD Player For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the for two seconds to eject all discs.
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead. playing.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, ©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics of the current track, if more than ten seconds have
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism. played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times,
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt the player continues moving backward or forward
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the through the tracks on the CD.
CD player could be damaged. While using the CD sREV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
player, use only CDs in good condition without any playback quickly. You will hear sound at a reduced
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player volume. Release to resume playing the track.
and the loading slot free of foreign materials, The elapsed time of the track displays.
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.

3-61
\FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance • Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD
playback quickly. You will hear sound at a reduced player, press and hold the LOAD ^button. A beep
volume. Release to resume playing the track. sounds and Load All Discs displays. Insert one or
The elapsed time of the track displays. more discs partway into the slot of the CD player.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, you can To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc
listen to the tracks in random, rather than sequential CD player in random order, press the pushbutton
order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CD player. positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
To use random on the Radio with CD (Base), do one of Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
the following: turn off random play.
1. Press to play tracks from the CD you are listening RPT (Repeat): For Radios with CD (Base), one track
to in random order. The random icon displays. can be repeated by using the repeat setting.
2. Press again to turn off random play. The random
To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
icon disappears from the display.
release the RPT button. An arrow symbol displays.
To use random on the Radio with CD (MP3) or the Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
Radio with Six-Disc player, do one of the following:
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD player, 4 (Information) (Radio with CD (Base)): Press to
insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD player. switch the display between the track number, elapsed
A RDM label displays. time of the track, and the time. When the ignition is
off, press this button to display the time.
To play the tracks from the single CD in random
order, press the pushbutton positioned under the
RDM label until Random Current Disc displays.
Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play.

3-62
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is CD Messages
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening. CHECK DISC: If an error message displays and/or the
CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while reasons:
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays when a CD • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
is in the player. Press again and the system normal, the CD should play.
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, • You are driving on a very rough road. When the
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc • The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
Radios with the MP3 feature are capable of playing an
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information on • There could have been a problem while burning
how to play an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc, see Using an the CD.
MP3 on page 3-64 later in this section. • The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer while reporting the problem.

3-63
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on the system begins to play audio from the connected
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not
audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
front auxiliary input jack. You can however, connect an
external audio device such as an iPod, laptop
computer, MP3 player, CD changer, or cassette tape Using an MP3
player, etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as another
source for audio listening. MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a
while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Driving CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction. with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album can
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
display when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers. Compressed Audio
O(Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or The radio also plays discs that contain both
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files.
the portable player. Additional volume adjustments By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio
might need to be made from the portable device. and ignores the MP3 files. Pressing the CAT (category)
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable audio button toggles between compressed and uncompressed
device is playing. The portable audio device continues to audio format.
play, so you might want to stop it or turn it off.

3-64
MP3 Format • Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
combination of a large number of files and folders,
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R or playlists can cause the player to be unable to
or CD-RW disc. play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a
large number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions,
one disc.
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
• Make sure the CD does not have more than a name. Long names also take up more space on the
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files to display, and might not fully display.
read and play.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find add music to an existing disc can cause the disc
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums not to function in the player.
using one folder for each album. Each folder
Playlists can be changed by using the previous and
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
next folder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to An MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded using no
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total file folders can also be played. If a CD-R or CD-RW
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate 50 playlists, and 255 files, the player lets you access
a particular folder during playback. and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over the
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension maximum are not accessible.
(other file extensions might not work).

3-65
Root Directory When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlists and
compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as located under the root folder. The folder down and the
a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first and then
files, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All files goes to the root folder. When the radio displays
contained directly under the root directory are accessed the name of the folder, the radio displays ROOT.
prior to any root directory folders. However, playlists
(Px) are always accessed before root folders or files. Order of Play
Empty Directory or Folder Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and • Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
no compressed files directly beneath them, the player and continues sequentially through all tracks in
advances to the next folder in the file structure that each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder does has played, play continues from the first track of
not display. the first playlist.

No Folder • Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only compressed folder. When the last track of the last folder has
files, the files are located under the root folder. The next played, play continues from the first track of the
and previous folder functions are not displayed on a first folder.
CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded without folders or
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
playlists. When displaying the name of the folder
automatically show the new folder name unless
the radio displays ROOT.
the folder mode was chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.

3-66
File System and Naming Z EJECT: Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or
The song name that displays is the song name that is CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name. Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can
be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed,
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of automatically pulls back into the player and begins
text and the extension of the filename does not display. playing. For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this
Preprogrammed Playlists button for two seconds to eject all discs.

Preprogrammed playlists that were created using f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software, CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special ©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
folders containing compressed audio song files. start of the current MP3 file, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to
Playing an MP3 the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or
pressed multiple times, the player continues moving
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single
backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD.
CD Player), or press the load button and wait for
the message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
should begin playing.
in the previous folder.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or CD-RW
in the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
radio is turned on, the CD-R starts to play where it under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. next folder.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.

3-67
sREV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. You will feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file the music navigator label. The player scans the disc to
displays. sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information.
It can take several minutes to scan the disc depending on
\FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to the number of MP3 files recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.
advance playback quickly within an MP3 file. You will The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file or CD-RW begins playing again.
displays.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files on playing MP3 files in order by artist. The current artist
the CD-R or CD-RW can be played in random, rather playing is shown on the second line of the display
than sequential order, on one CD-R/CD-RW or all discs between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist
in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of are played, the player moves to the next artist in
the following: alphabetical order on the CD-R/CD-RW and begins
playing MP3 files by that artist. If you want to listen to
1. To play MP3 files in random order from the CD-R
MP3 files by another artist, press the pushbutton located
or CD-RW that is currently playing, press the
below either arrow button. The CD goes to the next or
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until
previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing
Random Current Disc displays. Press the same
either button until the desired artist displays.
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc
CD player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.

3-68
To change from playback by artist to playback by XM Radio Messages
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By
label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
below the album button. Press the pushbutton below the any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
back label to return to the main music navigator by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
screen. The album name displays on the second line
between the arrows and songs from the current XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
album and begins to play. Once all songs from that being updated, and no action is required. This process
album are played, the player moves to the next album should take no longer than 30 seconds.
in alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
playing MP3 files from that album.
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton signal. When you move into an open area, the signal
below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback. should return.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio while Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the radio processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
for future listening. This message should disappear shortly.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
while listening to the radio. The CD icon and a service. Tune to another channel.
message showing disc and/or track number displays
while a CD is in the player. Press this button again and Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
input device such as a portable audio player. If a station was one of the presets, choose another station
portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input for that preset button.
Device” displays. No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.

3-69
No Title Info: No song title information is available at Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
this time on this channel. The system is working channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
properly. with your dealer/retailer.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
this time on this channel. The system is working within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
properly. fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Information: No text or informational messages are XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
available at this time on this channel. The system is within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
working properly. fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly. Theft-Deterrent Feature
XM TheftLocked: The XM™ receiver in the vehicle THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
could have previously been in another vehicle. vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
For security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
swapped between vehicles. If this message appears (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle,
after having your vehicle serviced, check with your it does not operate and LOC, LOCK, or LOCKED
dealer/retailer. could display.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
alternates with the XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. operate if stolen.
This label is needed to activate the service.

3-70
Audio Steering Wheel Controls When a CD is playing, press the arrows to go to the
previous or to the next track. Press and hold the arrows
Radio controls are located longer than three-quarters of a second to continue
on the inboard side of the reversing back or advancing ahead, to other tracks
steering wheel. If your within the disc.
vehicle has this feature,
+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to
some audio controls
increase or to decrease the volume.
can be adjusted at this
location. They include the g (Mute/Voice Activation): Press this button to
following:
silence the system. Press this button again to turn the
sound on. If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and
hold this button for two seconds to activate voice on
the OnStar® system. See the OnStar® System on
page 2-30 in this manual for more information.
wx(Previous/Next): Press the arrows to go to
the previous or to the next stored radio station and Radio Reception
stay there. Press and hold the arrows longer than Frequency interference and static can occur during
three-quarters of a second to advance to the previous normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
or to the next station with a strong signal in the chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
selected band. electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power outlet.

3-71
AM Fixed Mast Antenna
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
especially at night. The longer range can cause without being damaged. If the mast should ever
station frequencies to interfere with each other. become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
For better radio reception, most AM radio stations mast is badly bent, replace it.
boost the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
when things like storms and power lines interfere with tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten by
radio reception. When this happens, try reducing hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
the treble on your radio.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals only
System
reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings Your vehicle may have the XM™ Satellite Radio
or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the antenna that is located on the trunk of your vehicle.
sound to fade in and out. Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up
for clear radio reception.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or through tunnels could cause loss of
the XM™ signal for a period of time. The radio may
display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.

3-72
 Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2 Driving at Night ............................................4-15
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-15
Drunk Driving .................................................4-2 Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-16
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3 Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-16
Braking .........................................................4-3 Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-17
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-4 Winter Driving ..............................................4-18
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-6 Ice, or Snow .............................................4-22
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .....................................4-8 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-22
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ......................4-8 Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-23
Steering ......................................................4-11 Towing ..........................................................4-28
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-13 Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-28
Passing .......................................................4-13 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-28
Loss of Control .............................................4-13 Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-28

4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Drunk Driving
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They judgment can be affected by even a small
Are for Everyone on page 1-6. amount of alcohol. You can have a serious —
or even fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Do not drink and drive or ride with a
{CAUTION: driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
they might do and be ready. In addition: a global tragedy.
• Allow enough following distance between Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
you and the driver in front of you. vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
• Focus on the task of driving. attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
Driver distraction can cause collisions
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
resulting in injury or possible death.
these deaths are the result of someone who was
These simple defensive driving techniques
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
could save your life.
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.

4-2
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every Braking
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-27.
these laws. Braking action involves perception time and reaction
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
then drive. up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
system can make crash injuries worse, especially second. But that is only an average. It might be less
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
person had not been drinking. second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
Control of a Vehicle your vehicle and others is important.
The following three systems help to control your vehicle And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
more of those control systems than the tires and road can wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle. the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 and force applied.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-8.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.

4-3
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in If brake pedal feel changes or the brake pedal feels
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy hard to push, you might not be receiving the intended
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is brake boost and the SVC BRAKE SYSTEM DIC
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool message may be displayed.
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, Modifications on page 5-3.
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do, Your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC) with
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an advanced
engine stops, you will still have some power brake electronic braking system that will help prevent a
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the braking skid.
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
If your vehicle has the 2.0L turbocharged engine, it has motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and
a hydraulic brake boost feature as part of the Electronic you might even notice that the brake pedal moves
Stability Control which supplements the power brake a little. This is normal.
system to maintain consistent brake performance under
conditions of low brake booster vacuum. Low brake If there is a problem with
booster vacuum conditions can include initial start ABS, this warning light will
up after the vehicle has been parked for several hours, stay on. See Antilock
very frequent brake stops, or high altitude driving. Brake System Warning
When hydraulic brake boost is active, you might feel Light on page 3-28.
minor brake pulsation or movement but this is normal.

4-4
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely. Braking in Emergencies
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what With Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and Antilock
happens with ABS: Brake System (ABS), you can steer and brake at the
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer more than even the very best braking.
will separately work the brakes at each wheel. Brake Assist
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
Your vehicle has ESC with ABS. It also has a brake
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
assist feature that responds to emergency braking
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
by generating additional pressure and engaging the
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
ABS. When this happens, the brake pedal will feel easier
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates on to push. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. the system work for you. You might feel the brakes
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to vibrate or notice some noise, but this is normal.
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease The brakes will return to normal operation after the
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in brake pedal is released.
front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes if Brake assist cannot compensate for unsafe driving
that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave practices and braking effectiveness, itself, depends on
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you the condition of the road, tires, and brakes and
have ABS. vehicle mass.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might hear
the antilock pump or motor operate, and feel the
brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.

4-5
Traction Control System (TCS) If your vehicle is in cruise control when TCS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS) disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control.
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
senses that the rear wheels are spinning too much
When this light is on solid
or are beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
and either the SERVICE
the system works the rear brakes and reduces
TRACTION or TRACTION
engine power by closing the throttle and managing
OFF message is
engine spark to limit wheel spin.
displayed, the system will
If your vehicle has TCS, there is a ESC/TCS button not limit wheel spin.
located on the instrument panel.

This light will flash when

your traction control Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and
system is limiting Messages on page 3-41 for more information.
wheel spin. The Traction Control System is automatically enabled
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should always
leave the system enabled. You can turn TCS off if
you ever need to.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
normal. driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-29 ice or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to
for more information. attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off

4-6
the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and Brake
is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-22. warning lights and the SERVICE ESC and/or
SERVICE TRACTION messages are displayed, you
To turn the system off or could damage the differential. The repairs would not
on, press and release the be covered by your warranty. Reduce engine
ESC/TCS button located power and do not spin the wheel(s) excessively
on the instrument panel. while these lights and this message are displayed.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, or
Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to
lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the rear
wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible
The DIC will display the appropriate message as
to cause damage to the transmission. Do not
described previously when you press the button.
attempt to shift when the rear wheels do not have
traction. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is
Traction Control Operation not covered. See your warranty book for additional
Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine information.
power to the wheels (engine speed management)
The traction control system may activate on dry or
and by applying brakes to each individual wheel
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
(brake-traction control) as necessary.
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
The traction control system is enabled automatically of the transmission. When this happens, you may
when you start your vehicle, and it will activate and flash notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise
the ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTION or vibration. This is normal.
message if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning
or beginning to lose traction while driving. For more
information on the LOW TRACTION message,
see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-38.

4-7
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
activates, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road Your vehicle may have an Electronic Stability Control
conditions allow you to use cruise control again, you (ESC) system which combines antilock brake, and
may re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control traction and stability control systems that help the driver
on page 3-10. maintain directional control of the vehicle in most
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect driving conditions.
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information. system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure
there are no problems. You may hear or feel the system
Limited-Slip Rear Axle working. This is normal and does not mean there is a
problem with your vehicle. The system should initialize
Your vehicle may have a limited-slip rear differential before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
which provides maximum power and performance. If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS
It is designed to give you additional traction on snow, light comes on, and the ESC OFF and/or SERVICE ESC
mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard message displays.
axle most of the time, but when one of the rear wheels
has no traction and the other does, this feature will For more information, see Driver Information Center
allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle. (DIC) on page 3-38 and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
During a sudden shift, such as shifting from FIRST (1) Light on page 3-29.
to SECOND (2) gear at low engine speeds or suddenly
applying the clutch, you may feel or hear a clunking
or rattling noise. This is normal.

4-8
 This light flashes on the See Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
instrument panel cluster System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-29
while the ESC system for more information.
is on and activated. The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is
automatically enabled whenever the vehicle is started.
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should always
leave the system on. But, ESC can be turned off if
ESC activates when the computer senses a discrepancy needed.
between your intended path and the direction the vehicle If the vehicle is in cruise control while the system begins
is actually traveling. ESC selectively applies braking to assist the driver maintain directional control of the
pressure at any one of the vehicle’s brakes to help steer vehicle, the ESC/TCS light flashes and the cruise control
the vehicle in the direction which you are steering. automatically disengages. When road conditions allow
When the system activates, an ESC ACTIVE message you to use cruise again, you may re-engage the
displays on the Driver Information Center. See DIC cruise control. See Cruise Control on page 3-10.
Warnings and Messages on page 3-41. This light flashes The ESC/TCS button
on the instrument panel cluster when the ESC system is located on the
is on and activated. You may also hear a noise or instrument panel.
feel vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal.
Continue to steer the vehicle in the direction you want
it to go.
When the light is comes on and the message(s)
SERVICE ESC, ESC OFF, or both displays, the system
will not assist the driver in maintaining directional The traction control system can be turned off or back on
control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-41. traction control and ESC, press and hold the button from
five to ten seconds.

4-9
When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION Competitive Driving Mode
OFF and ESC OFF messages appear, and the
ESC/TCS light comes on to warn the driver that both The driver can select this optional handling mode by
traction control and ESC are disabled. pressing the ESC/TCS button on the console two times
within a five second time period. COMPETITIVE
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal MODE displays in the DIC. See DIC Warnings and
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn Messages on page 3-41 for more information.
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, Competitive Driving Mode allows the driver to have full
ice or snow and you want to “rock” your vehicle control of the rear wheels while the ESC system
to attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off helps maintain directional control of the vehicle by
the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions selective brake application. The ESC/TCS light will be
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is on and the traction control system will not be operating.
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-22. Also, Adjust your driving accordingly. This electronic stability
see “Competitive Driving Mode” later in this section. control mode is recommended only for use during closed
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that track events and competitive driving venues.
a problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF and When the ESC/TCS button is pressed again, or the
SERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light comes vehicle is restarted, the ESC and TCS turn back on.
on to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and requires
service. If the problem does not clear after restarting Notice: When traction control is turned off, or
the vehicle, see your dealer/retailer for service. Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-41 for lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the rear
more information. wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect to cause damage to the transmission. Do not
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and attempt to shift when the rear wheels do not have
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information. traction. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is
not covered. See your warranty book for additional
information.

4-10
Steering work where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
antilock brakes, adding the hard braking can demand
Power Steering too much of those places. You can lose control.

If you lose power steering assist because the engine The same thing can happen if you are steering through
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
it will take much more effort. two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
Steering Tips road and make you lose control. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-6 and Electronic Stability
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed. Control (ESC) on page 4-8.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the news happen on curves. the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
Here is why: you want it to go, and slow down.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your the
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
wheels are straight ahead.
will understand this.
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
Modifications on page 5-3.
systems — steering and braking — have to do their

4-11
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on
page 4-3. It is better to remove as much speed as you
can from a possible collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending on the space
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
available.
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-12
Off-Road Recovery Passing
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
you are driving. we suggest the following tips:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.

Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
has asked.
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
straight down the roadway. danger.

4-13
Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
those conditions. But skids are always possible. vehicle control more limited.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much cause the tires to slide. You might not realize the
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best Learn to recognize warning clues — such as enough
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make a
mirrored surface — and slow down when you have
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System any doubt.
(TCS), remember: It helps to avoid only the acceleration
skid. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6. Even though your vehicle has Electronic Stability
If you do not have TCS, or if the system is off, then Control (ESC) with Antilock Brake System (ABS),
an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your remember: ABS helps avoid only the braking skid.
foot off the accelerator pedal. If the ABS is ever disabled, in a braking skid, where
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the the wheels are no longer rolling, release enough
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again.
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, This restores steering control. Push the brake pedal
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready down steadily when you have to stop suddenly.
for a second skid if it occurs. As long as the wheels are rolling, you will have
steering control.
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
the ESC might activate. See Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) on page 4-8.

4-14
Driving at Night Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
Night driving tips include: driving through large puddles and deep-standing
or flowing water.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside {CAUTION:
rearview mirror.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
other vehicles because your headlamps can only work as well in a quick stop and could cause
light up so much road ahead. pulling to one side. You could lose control of
• Watch for animals. the vehicle.
• When tired, pull off the road. After driving through a large puddle of water
• Do not wear sunglasses. or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps. pedal until the brakes work normally.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle Flowing or rushing water creates strong
clean — inside and out. forces. Driving through flowing water could
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
or curves. happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. and be very cautious about trying to drive
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
through flowing water.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

4-15
Hydroplaning Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
Things to check on your own include:
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. • Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full?
Windows clean — inside and outside?
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet. • Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Other Rainy Weather Tips • Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips • Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
include: recommended pressure?
• Allow extra following distance. • Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
Have up-to-date maps?
• Pass with caution.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape. Highway Hypnosis
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled. Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
See Tires on page 5-50.
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.

4-16
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different {CAUTION:
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include: Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape. ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling to do all the work of slowing down and they
system, and transmission. could get so hot that they would not work well.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear. You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
{CAUTION: vehicle in gear when you go downhill.

If you do not shift down, the brakes could • Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
get so hot that they would not work well. across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
You would then have poor braking or even that let you stay in your own lane.
none going down a hill. You could crash. • Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes lane (stalled car, accident).
on a steep downhill slope.
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.

4-17
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies
in your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple
of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-50.

Driving on Snow or Ice

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
road probably have good traction.
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to be Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
very careful. can get there.

4-18
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing, If the ABS is ever disabled, if you feel your vehicle
or loose snow — drive with caution. begin to slide, let up on the brakes a little. Push the
brake pedal down steadily to get the most traction
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate when
you can.
driving on a slippery road. Even if your vehicle has
the Traction Control System (TCS), slow down • Allow greater following distance on any
and adjust your driving to the road conditions. Under slippery road.
certain conditions, you might want to turn the TCS
off, such as when driving through deep snow and loose
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at lower until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.
speeds or if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, On an otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear
ice, or snow. See Traction Control System (TCS) on in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach,
page 4-6, Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-8, such as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
on page 4-22, and Winter Tires on page 5-51. or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and while you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
polish the surface under the tires even more. steering maneuvers.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
See Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-4.

4-19
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

4-20
 Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
{CAUTION: faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with the headlamps. Let the
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
heater run for a while.
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
base of your vehicle, especially any that is again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
again from time to time to be sure snow does keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
not collect there. some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
Open a window just a little on the side of the help comes.
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.

4-21
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Mud, Ice, or Snow First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your or stability system. See Traction Control System
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. (TCS) on page 4-6 and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-22. on page 4-8. Then shift back and forth between
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, or with a manual
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction transmission between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2)
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too severe and REVERSE (R), spinning the wheels as little as
for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the
traction system off and use the rocking method. wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
{CAUTION: By slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion
that could free your vehicle. If that does not get your
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be
speed, they can explode, and you or others towed out. If your vehicle does need to be towed out,
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-28.
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,

see Tire Chains on page 5-72.

4-22
Loading Your Vehicle Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification
label.

{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross Label Example
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
can change the way your vehicle handles. label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar)
These could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. With the driver’s door open, you
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten will find the label attached below the door
the life of your vehicle. latch. This label shows the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).

4-23
For more information on tires and inflation see 4. The resulting figure equals the available
Tires on page 5-50 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
page 5-56. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
There is also important loading information on the 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
vehicle Certification label. It tells you the Gross passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle available cargo and luggage load capacity is
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
See “Certification Label” later in this section. 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit That weight may not safely exceed the
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of available cargo and luggage load capacity
occupants and cargo should never exceed calculated in Step 4.
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver from your trailer will be transferred to your
and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
vehicle. this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. to tow a trailer.

4-24
 Example 1 Example 2

Item Description Total Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity Vehicle Capacity
A
Weight for Example 1 = 400 lbs (181 kg)
A
Weight for Example 2 = 400 lbs (181 kg)
Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant
B Weight @ 150 lbs 150 lbs (68 kg) B Weight @ 150 lbs 300 lbs (136 kg)
(68 kg) x 1 = (68 kg) x 2 =
Available Occupant and 250 lbs (113 kg) Available Cargo
C C 100 lbs (45 kg)
Cargo Weight = Weight =

4-25
 Certification Label

Example 3

Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity
A
Weight for Example 3 = 400 lbs (181 kg)
Subtract Occupant A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
B Weight @ 200 lbs 400 lbs (181 kg) the rear edge of the driver’s door or the vehicle’s
(91 kg) x 2 = center pillar (B-pillar) below the driver’s door latch.
Available Cargo It tells you the gross weight capacity of your
C 0 lbs (0 kg) vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Weight =
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Information label for specific information about Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either
positions. The combined weight of the driver, the front or rear axle.
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.

4-26
 If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they
{CAUTION: will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than keep going.
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, {CAUTION:
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles. Things you put inside your vehicle can
These could cause you to lose control strike and injure people in a sudden stop
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten or turn, or in a crash.
the life of your vehicle.
• Put things in the rear area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause evenly.
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your • Never stack heavier things, like
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle. suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.

4-27
Towing Recreational Vehicle Towing
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing your vehicle
Towing Your Vehicle may cause damage to the vehicle. Always put
your vehicle on a flatbed truck.
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended to be
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
towed with any of its wheels on the ground. If your
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.
vehicle must be towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle”
earlier in this section.

Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to tow
a trailer.

4-28
 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3 Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................5-23
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3 Engine Coolant .............................................5-24
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-26
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4 Engine Overheating .......................................5-26
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4 Cooling System ............................................5-28
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-33
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-5 Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-34
Fuel ................................................................5-5 Brakes ........................................................5-35
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5 Battery ........................................................5-38
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6 Jump Starting ...............................................5-39
California Fuel ...............................................5-6 Rear Axle .......................................................5-44
Additives .......................................................5-6 Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-44
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8 Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-44
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10 Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-45
Headlamps and Parking Lamps ......................5-45
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10 Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps ......5-46
Hood Release ..............................................5-11 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12 Sidemarker Lamps .....................................5-46
Engine Oil ...................................................5-15 Back-Up Lamps ............................................5-47
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-19 License Plate Lamp ......................................5-48
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-21 Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-48
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-23
Manual Transmission Fluid .............................5-23 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-49

5-1
 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Tires ..............................................................5-50 Weatherstrips ...............................................5-87
Winter Tires .................................................5-51 Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-87
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-52 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-88
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-54 Finish Care ..................................................5-88
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-56 Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-89
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-58 Convertible Top ............................................5-89
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-59 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-63 and Trim ..................................................5-90
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-65 Tires ...........................................................5-91
Buying New Tires .........................................5-66 Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-91
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-67 Finish Damage .............................................5-91
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-68 Underbody Maintenance ................................5-91
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-69 Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-91
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-70 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-92
Tire Chains ..................................................5-72 Vehicle Identification ......................................5-93
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-72 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-93
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ....................5-74 Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-93
Appearance Care ............................................5-84 Electrical System ............................................5-94
Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-84 Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-94
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-85 Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-94
Leather .......................................................5-86 Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-94
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-94
Plastic Surfaces ........................................5-86 Floor Console Fuse Block ..............................5-95
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-87 Underhood Fuse Block ..................................5-96
Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-99

5-2
Service Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer. When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
You will receive genuine Saturn parts and Saturn-trained your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and supported service people. and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks. aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know
that GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-48.

5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive {CAUTION:
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and You can be injured and your vehicle could be
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit damaged if you try to do service work on a
these chemicals. vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
California Perchlorate Materials experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
Requirements maintenance task.
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag • Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries other fasteners. English and metric
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may fasteners can be easily confused. If you
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
may be necessary. For additional information, see break or fall off. You could be hurt.
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

5-4
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
Fuel
more about how to service your vehicle than this Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15. keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-48.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list Gasoline Octane
the mileage and the date of any service work you
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.
rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but
Adding Equipment to the Outside your vehicle’s acceleration could be slightly reduced,
and you might notice a slight audible knocking
of Your Vehicle noise, commonly referred to as spark knock. If the
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can octane is less than 87, you might notice a heavy
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a
noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer possible. Otherwise, you could damage the engine.
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.

5-5
Gasoline Specifications Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or are now required to contain additives that help prevent
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl the emission control system to work properly. In most
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
against the use of gasolines containing MMT. However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
See Additives on page 5-6 for additional information. amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle
California Fuel experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves,
look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Detergent Gasoline. Also, your dealer/retailer has
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
additives that will help correct and prevent most
meet California specifications. See the underhood
deposit-related problems.
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
federal specifications, but emission control system in your area. We recommend that you use these
performance might be affected. The malfunction gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might fail described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
on page 3-32. If this occurs, return to your authorized not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that those fuels.
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
might not be covered by your warranty.

5-6
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that Fuels in Foreign Countries
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel If you plan on driving in another country outside the
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be
That damage would not be covered under your hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other
warranty. fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive be covered by your warranty.
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline contact a major oil company that does business in the
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against country where you will be driving.
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.

5-7
Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not use
cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, and
smoking materials away from fuel. Do not leave
the fuel pump unattended when refueling your
vehicle. This is against the law in some places. The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping fuel. door on the driver side of the vehicle.
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
let children pump fuel.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.

5-8
 Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The CHECK GAS CAP message displays if the fuel cap
{CAUTION: is not properly installed. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-41 for more information.
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned. {CAUTION:
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop. remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
Then unscrew the cap all the way. shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel the right type. Your dealer/ retailer can get one
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-87. fit properly. This may cause your malfunction
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic tank and emissions system. See Malfunction
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or Indicator Lamp on page 3-32.
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-32.

5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the
Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
{CAUTION:
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can An electric fan under the hood can start up
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if and injure you even when the engine is not
this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
others: from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or {CAUTION:
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
inside of the fill opening before operating and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
until the filling is complete. other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel. others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
• Do not use a cellular phone while or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
pumping fuel.

5-10
Hood Release 2. Pull down on the rear
edge of the lever to
To open the hood, do the following: release the hood latch.

1. Locate the interior

hood release lever.
It is located below the
instrument panel
on the driver’s side of
the vehicle.

3. Go to the side of the vehicle and pull up on the

rear edge of the hood, near the windshield to
open the hood.
Notice: Closing the hood with the doors open may
damage the hood and/or doors. Always close the
doors before closing the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then, pull the hood down and close it firmly.

5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 2.4L L4 engine, this is what you will see:

5-12
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
on page 5-34. G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling Fluid on page 5-33.
System on page 5-28. H. Remote Negative (−) Ground (Out of View).
C. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” See Jump Starting on page 5-39.
under Brakes on page 5-35 and Hydraulic Clutch I. Battery (Out of View). See Battery on page 5-38.
on page 5-23.
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking page 5-39.
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air on page 5-96.
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.

5-13
When you open the hood on the 2.0L L4 engine, this is what you will see:

5-14
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding Engine Oil
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-34. Checking Engine Oil
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
System on page 5-28. get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
C. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
under Brakes on page 5-35 and Hydraulic Clutch The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
on page 5-23. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” the location of the engine oil dipstick.
under Engine Oil on page 5-15. 1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21. the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil” 2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
under Engine Oil on page 5-15. cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down and check the level.
G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-33. When to Add Engine Oil
H. Remote Negative (−) Ground (Out of View).
See Jump Starting on page 5-39.
I. Battery (Out of View). See Battery on page 5-38.
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-39.
K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-96.
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, add at
least one quart/liter of the recommended oil.

5-15
This section explains what kind of oil to use. What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-99. For Vehicles With the 2.0L L4 Engine
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,
the engine could be damaged.

2.4L L4 Engine 2.0L L4 Engine

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for Look for three things:
the location of the engine oil fill cap. • GM4718M
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the GM Standard GM4718M, such as Mobil 1® or
way back in when you are through. equivalent. Oils meeting this standard may
be identified as synthetic. However, not all synthetic
oils will meet this GM standard. Look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
5-16
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the Look for this on the oil container, and use only those
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard
engine damage not covered by your warranty. GM4718M and have the starburst symbol on the front
• SAE 5W-30 of the oil container.
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
for your vehicle. synthetic oil which meets all requirements for your
vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
oils such as SAE 20W-50. engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
• Oils meeting these designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
requirements should temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
have the starburst GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).

5-17
For Vehicles With the 2.4L L4 Engine • SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, and

Look for three things: use only those oils that are identified as meeting
• GM6094M GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting on the front of the oil container.
GM Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only an
oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

5-18
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American oil change will be indicated can vary considerably.
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines For the oil life system to work properly, you must reset
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended the system every time the oil is changed.
oil can result in engine damage not covered by When the system has calculated that oil life has been
your warranty. diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message will come
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-41.
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 Change the oil as soon as possible within the next
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
cold starting and better protection for the engine at driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
extremely low temperatures. might not indicate that an oil change is necessary
for over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must
Engine Oil Additives be changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
service people who will perform this work using genuine
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
parts and reset the system. It is also important to
GM6094M are all you need for good performance and
check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
engine protection.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last
Engine Oil Life System oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
When to Change Engine Oil whenever the oil is changed.

Your vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System, a computer

system that lets you know when to change the engine
oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions
and engine temperature, and not on mileage.

5-19
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System What to Do with Used Oil
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
situation occurs where you change the oil prior to hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
a CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on, rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
reset the system. warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset: Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off. change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
2. Press the information and reset buttons on the in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
Driver Information Center (DIC) at the same streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
time to enter the personalization menu. See DIC taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-45. problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your
3. Press the information button to scroll through the dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling
available personalization menu modes until the center for help.
DIC display shows OIL-LIFE RESET.
4. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC display
shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This will tell you the
system has been reset.
5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the reset procedure.

5-20
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

2.0L L4 Engine

2.4L L4 Engine See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for

the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

5-21
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter {CAUTION:
Inspect the air cleaner/filter element at each scheduled
Maintenance II service interval and replace the air Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
cleaner/filter element at the first oil change after off can cause you or others to be burned.
50,000 miles (80 000 km). If you are driving in The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
engine oil change. not there and the engine backfires, you could
How to Inspect the Engine Air be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
Cleaner/Filter cleaner/filter off.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
filter is required. cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into your engine, which will damage it. Always have
To inspect or replace the filter, open the clamps that the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
hold the cover on and lift off the cover. Be sure to
reinstall the cover tightly.

5-22
Automatic Transmission Fluid Manual Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. It is not necessary to check the manual transmission
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason
loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to a for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to a
dealer/retailer and have it repaired as soon as possible. dealer/retailer for service. Have it repaired as soon as
possible. You may also have your fluid level checked by
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
the Maintenance Schedule. See Scheduled Maintenance your dealer/retailer when you have your oil changed.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12
on page 6-4. Be sure to use the transmission fluid
for the proper fluid to use.
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
Hydraulic Clutch
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
may not be covered by your warranty. Always self-adjusting. This system does not have its own
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in reservoir. It receives fluid from the brake master
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12. cylinder reservoir.
See Brakes on page 5-35 for more information.

5-23
Engine Coolant What to Use
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only not need to add anything else.
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem {CAUTION:
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-26. Adding only plain water to your cooling
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
DEX-COOL® coolant will: some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C). before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
• Help keep the proper engine temperature. but you would not get the overheat warning.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as Your engine could catch fire and you or others
they should. could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs The repair cost would not be covered by your
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle. and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.

5-24
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system. more information on location.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture {CAUTION:
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
Checking Coolant and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your

engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
COLD FILL line.
Do not overfill the surge tank. Too much coolant can
result in an overflow condition when the fluid is hot.

The coolant surge tank is located in the engine

compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

5-25
Adding Coolant Engine Overheating
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL® There is an engine coolant temperature warning light on
coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank, but only your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
when the engine is cool. If the coolant surge tank is Temperature Warning Light on page 3-30 for more
empty, a special fill procedure is necessary. See Engine information.
Overheating on page 5-26 for instructions on “How to
Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.” If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot Steam from an overheated engine can burn
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, you badly, even if you just open the hood.
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
hand-tight and fully seated. coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, You or others could be badly burned. Stop
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur. your engine if it overheats, and get out of the
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured. vehicle until the engine is cool.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.

5-26
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you If you get the engine coolant temperature warning with
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be 1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
covered by your warranty.
2. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
If No Steam Is Coming From Your while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
Engine engine idle.
An engine coolant temperature warning can indicate a 3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
serious problem. See Engine Coolant Temperature speed and open the windows as necessary.
Warning Light on page 3-30. If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
If you get an engine coolant temperature warning, but drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot normally.
when you: If the warning continues and you have not stopped,
• Climb a long hill on a hot day. pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
• Stop after high-speed driving. If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still have
• Idle for long periods in traffic. the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out
of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.

5-27
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:

2.0L L4 Engine
A. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)
2.4 L4 Engine
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View) {CAUTION:
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.

5-28
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle to see if the electric engine cooling fan are running.
should be parked on a level surface. If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running.
If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.
If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
water pump, or somewhere in the cooling system.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
{CAUTION: require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine would not be covered by the warranty. Always use
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant.
That could cause an engine fire, and you could
be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.

5-29
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank, add
coolant as follows:
Surge Tank
Notice: The engine has a specific cooling system
drain and fill procedure. Failure to follow this {CAUTION:
procedure could cause the engine to overheat and
be severely damaged. If the engine’s cooling system Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
needs to be drained and re-filled, please see the
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
dealer/retailer.
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If coolant is can come out at high speed. Never turn the
visible but the coolant level is not at the COLD FILL cap when the cooling system, including the
line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but
be sure the cooling system, including the coolant for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for more information. the pressure cap.

5-30
 {CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong 1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you when the cooling system, including the coolant
would not get the overheat warning. The engine surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
could catch fire and you or others could be is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable counterclockwise about two or two and one-half
water and DEX-COOL® coolant. turns. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
This will allow any pressure still left to be vented
out the discharge hose.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
2. Then keep turning the
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
pressure cap slowly,
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
and remove it.
coolant mixture.

5-31
 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower than
the COLD FILL line, add more of the proper mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches
the COLD FILL line.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
See your dealer/retailer, if necessary.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,

to the COLD FILL line. Wait about five minutes,
then check to see if the level is below the COLD
FILL line. If the level is below the line, add additional
coolant to bring the level up to the line. Repeat this
procedure until the level remains constant at the
COLD FILL line for at least five minutes.

5-32
Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
for reservoir location. cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be between the COLD and HOT
marks. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
When to Check Power Steering Fluid level up to the COLD mark.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid What to Use
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
and repaired. Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

5-33
Windshield Washer Fluid Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will • Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
be operating your vehicle in an area where the Water can cause the solution to freeze and
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
has sufficient protection against freezing. of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid • Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
Open the cap with the
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
washer symbol on it.
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine • Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
Compartment Overview on windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
page 5-12 for reservoir windshield washer system and paint.
location.

5-34
Brakes It is not a good idea to top off the brake/clutch fluid.
Adding fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
Brake Fluid the brake linings are worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove
The brake master cylinder fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the
reservoir is filled with brake/clutch hydraulic system.
DOT-3 brake fluid.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 {CAUTION:
for the location of the
reservoir.
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the
engine is hot enough. You or others could be
burned, and your vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is done on the
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in brake and/or clutch hydraulic system.
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
that fluid is leaking out of the brake and/or clutch Light on page 3-27.
hydraulic system. If it is, you should have the brake
and/or clutch hydraulic system fixed, since a leak means
that sooner or later your brakes and/or clutch will not
work well.

5-35
What to Add Notice:
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake • Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container or clutch hydraulic system parts. For example,
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such
page 6-12. as engine oil, in the brake or clutch hydraulic
system can damage brake or clutch hydraulic
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area system parts so badly that they will have
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep to be replaced. Do not let someone put in the
dirt from entering the reservoir. wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
{CAUTION: surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake or See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-87.
clutch hydraulic system, the brakes or clutch
might not work well. This could cause a crash.
Always use the proper brake fluid.

5-36
Brake Wear Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Front disc brake pads brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched the proper sequence to torque specifications in
warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new Capacities and Specifications on page 5-99.
pads are needed. The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time your vehicle is moving, except Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly. axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
{CAUTION: See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
The brake wear warning sound means that might be required.
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake Brake Adjustment
wear warning sound, have your vehicle Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
serviced. vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake

pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.

5-37
Replacing Brake System Parts Vehicle Storage
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle {CAUTION:
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
example, when the brake linings wear down and you that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-39
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake for tips on working around a battery without
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance getting hurt.
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
Battery remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for the charge of the battery over an extended period
one that has the replacement number shown on the of time.
original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.

5-38
Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to by your warranty.
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
do it safely.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{CAUTION: Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
because: with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
• They contain acid that can burn you. 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
• They contain gas that can explode or can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
ignite. each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
• They contain enough electricity to to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
burn you. could damage the electrical systems.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
or all of these things can hurt you. the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.

5-39
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories The remote positive (+)
on during the jump starting procedure, they could terminal is located under a
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered red plastic cover on the
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and engine compartment
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle. fuse block. Open the
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug red plastic cover to access
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette the terminal.
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the Do not remove fuse block cover to jump start the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on vehicle.
that vehicle.
You will not need to access your battery for jump The remote negative (−)
starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) and ground bracket is located
a remote negative (−) jump starting terminal. in the rear of the engine
compartment, on the
passenger’s side of
the vehicle, and is
marked GND (−).

5-40
 See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on the location of the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminals on your {CAUTION:
vehicle.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
{CAUTION: this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
An electric fan can start up even when the Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
engine is not running and can injure you. not need to add water to the battery installed
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
underhood electric fan. caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.

5-41
 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal location on the vehicle with the dead
{CAUTION: battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure 7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
parts once the engine is running. remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
Before you connect the cables, here are some does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy, dead battery.
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. 9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle with
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote
will get a short that would damage the battery negative (−) ground bracket for this purpose.
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the dead battery because this can cause sparks. the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.

5-42
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may do the following:
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would 1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect vehicle that had the dead battery.
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch 2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
each other or other metal. vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to its original
position.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote

Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

5-43
Rear Axle If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
When to Check Lubricant bottom of the filler plug hole.
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an What to Use
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
Have it inspected and repaired. kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.
How to Check Lubricant
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.

Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs,
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
see Replacement Bulbs on page 5-48.
level surface.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.

5-44
Halogen Bulbs To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.

Headlamps and Parking Lamps

2. Remove the bulb access cover from the bulb

(high or low-beam only) you need to change.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
from the headlamp assembly.
4. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb
socket.
5. Holding the base of the socket, pull the old bulb
A. High-beam Headlamp from the socket.
B. Low-beam Headlamp 6. Install a new bulb.
C. Parking Lamp 7. Reverse Steps 2 through 5 to reinstall.

5-45
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
Fog Lamps and Sidemarker Lamps
A. Front Turn Signal/ To replace one of these bulbs:
Parking Lamp 1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-8 for more
B. Fog Lamp information.

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
2. Reach underneath the front bumper and locate the
bulb assembly.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out 2. Remove the two screws, which hold the taillamp
the bulb assembly. assembly, from inside the vehicle.
4. Disconnect the bulb socket from the electrical 3. Pull the taillamp assembly upwards and sideways
connector. to disengage it from the vehicle.
5. Install a new bulb. 4. Remove the taillamp assembly.
6. Reverse the steps to reinstall.

5-46
 5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove. To replace a bulb:
6. Pull the bulb from the socket. 1. Reach behind, up and under the rear fascia and
7. Install a new bulb. locate the bulb socket.

8. Reverse the steps to reinstall the taillamp assembly. 2. Turn it counterclockwise to remove from the
bulb assembly.
3. Pull the bulb from the bulb socket.
Back-Up Lamps
4. Push in a new bulb into the bulb socket.
5. Reinstall the bulb socket by lining up the tabs
in the lamp assembly and turn it clockwise to
secure it.

The back-up lamps are located in the rear fascia.

5-47
License Plate Lamp Replacement Bulbs
To replace the license plate lamp bulb:
Exterior Lamp Bulb Number
Back-Up Lamp, Stoplamp, 3157K
Taillamp and Turn Signal
Fog Lamp H11
Front Parking Lamp
(In Headlamp Assembly) W5W-B50X2

Front Parking Lamp/

Turn Signal Lamp 5702KA
(Below Headlamp Assembly)
Front and Rear Sidemarker Lamp 194
License Plate Lamp 168
Headlamps
High-Beam Headlamp H9
1. Remove the two screws holding the license plate Low-Beam Headlamp H11
lamp assembly to the fascia.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
through the fascia opening. dealer/retailer.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the lamp
assembly.

5-48
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-14.

2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage the hook

and push the wiper arm (A) out of the blade (C).
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release lever click into
place.

To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do

the following:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

5-49
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where • Underinflated tires pose the same
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty danger as overloaded tires. The
booklet for details. For additional information refer resulting accident could cause serious
to the tire manufacturer’s booklet included with injury. Check all tires frequently to
your vehicle’s Owner Manual. maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
{CAUTION: Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a
Poorly maintained and improperly used sudden impact — such as when you
tires are dangerous. hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can recommended pressure.
cause overheating as a result of too • Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
much flexing. You could have an If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if
air-out and a serious accident. your vehicle’s tires have been
See Loading Your Vehicle on damaged, replace them.
page 4-23.
CAUTION: (Continued)

5-50
Low-Profile Tires tires for your vehicle. The low-profile performance tires
may not offer the traction you would like or the same
If your vehicle has P245/45R18 size tires, they are level of performance as winter tires on snow or ice
classified as low-profile tires. These tires are covered roads.
designed for very responsive driving on wet or dry
pavement. You may also notice more road noise Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
with low-profile performance tires and that they traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
tend to wear faster. tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter tire tread life.
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires, After switching to winter tires, be alert for changes in
they are more susceptible to damage from road vehicle handling and braking.
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire
can occur when coming into contact with road availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects, New Tires on page 5-66.
or when sliding into a curb. Your vehicle If you choose to use winter tires:
warranty does not cover this type of damage. • Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
Keep tires set to the correct inflation
four wheel positions.
pressure and, when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards. • Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range,
and speed rating as the original equipment tires.
Winter Tires Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
If your vehicle has P245/45R18 size tires, they are and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
classified as low-profile performance tires. These tires a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
are designed for very responsive driving on wet or speed capability.
dry pavement. If you expect to drive on snow or
ice covered roads often, you may want to get winter

5-51
Tire Sidewall Labeling (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
Useful information about a tire is molded into its to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
sidewall. The example below shows a typical a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
passenger (p-metric) tire sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example (F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of tires based on three performance factors:
letters and numbers used to define a particular treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
and service description. See the “Tire Size” Grading on page 5-68.
illustration later in this section for more detail.
5-52
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
Maximum load that can be carried and the indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
maximum pressure needed to support that load. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,
as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
Tire Size mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high
as it is wide.
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size. (D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States represent the load range and speed rating of the
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P tire. The load index represents the load carry
as the first character in the tire size means a capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
by the U. S. Tire and Rim Association. the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.

5-53
Tire Terminology and Definitions Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the but without passengers and cargo.
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
Accessory Weight: This means the combined with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
optional accessories are, automatic transmission, includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
power steering, power brakes, power windows, an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
power seats, and air conditioning. the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height and date of production.
to its width. GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-23.
located between the plies and the tread. Cords GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
may be made from steel or other reinforcing front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on
materials. page 4-23.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-23.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
to the centerline of the tread. outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on vehicles.
page 5-56.
5-54
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
capacity of a tire. multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the pressure as shown on the tire placard.
sidewall. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56 and
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-23.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
for that tire. ply cords that extend to the beads are laid
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
weight, and production options weight. the tire beads are seated.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied and the bead.
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
on page 4-23. a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions. Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. contact with the road.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, called wear bars, that show across the tread of
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
or deeper than the same moldings on the other remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
sidewall of the tire. page 5-65.
5-55
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Inflation - Tire Pressure
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are operate effectively.
determined by tire manufacturers using Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
government testing procedures. The ratings are under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-68. (under-inflation), you can get the following:
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of • Too much flexing
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. • Too much heat
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-23. • Tire overloading
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on • Premature or irregular wear
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory • Poor handling
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight. • Reduced fuel economy
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity you can get the following:
weight and the original equipment tire size and • Unusual wear
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading • Poor handling
Your Vehicle on page 4-23. • Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards

5-56
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information Radial tires may look properly inflated even when
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows they are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
amount of air pressure needed to support Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity. get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
For additional information regarding how much inflation pressure matches the recommended
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
the Tire and Loading Information label, see label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-23. How you load inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride recommended amount.
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
than it was designed to carry. the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
When to Check Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
Check your tires once a month or more. stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.

5-57
Tire Pressure Monitor System Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. for approximately one minute and then remain
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
pressure label, you should determine the proper malfunction exists.
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one a variety of reasons, including the installation of
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-59,
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling for additional information.
and stopping ability.

5-58
Federal Communications Commission Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
(FCC) and Industry and Science The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
Canada to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the pressure in the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
2. This device must accept any interference received, TPMS turns on the low tire
including interference that may cause undesired pressure warning light
operation. located on the instrument
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on panel cluster.
a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 of
Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device. At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
Changes or modifications to this system by other than (DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
an authorized service facility could void authorization to DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
use this equipment. until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.

5-59
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
driver. For additional information and details about the
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
Displays on page 3-38 and DIC Warnings and Messages TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
on page 3-41. system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure. conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of message to come on are:
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct • The TPMS sensor matching process was started
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are
but not completed or not completed successfully
cold. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-23, for an
after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message
example of the Tire and Loading Information label and
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
its location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
Pressure on page 5-56.
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low later in this section.
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal • One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
on page 5-63 and Tires on page 5-50.
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the sensors are installed and the sensor matching
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. process is performed successfully. See your
Sensor damage caused by using a tire sealant is not dealer/retailer for service.
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.

5-60
 • Replacement tires or wheels do not match your TPMS Sensor Matching Process
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
page 5-66. need to be matched to the new tire/wheel location.
The sensors are matched, to the tire/wheel locations, in
• Operating electronic devices or being near the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
facilities using radio wave frequencies similar side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side
to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
malfunction. dealer/retailer for service.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, do
comes on and stays on. not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure
use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match any
tire and wheel position, the matching process stops
and you need to start over.

5-61
The TPMS matching process is outlined below: 7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to
1. Set the parking brake. indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the repeat the procedure in Step 5.
engine off.
8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to
3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
transmitter’s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, at the Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat
same time, for about five seconds to start the TPMS the procedure in Step 5.
learn mode. The horn sounds twice indicating the
TPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode. 9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound to
4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side indicate the tire learning process is done.
front turn signal also comes on to indicate that Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
corner’s sensor is ready to be learned.
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve stem. learn mode, or if communication with the receiver
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or stops, or if the time limit has expired, turn the
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for about ignition switch to LOCK/OFF and start over
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to beginning with Step 2.
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
all the turn signals flash one time to confirm the
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
sensor identification code has been matched to
Information label.
the tire/wheel position.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.

5-62
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires for signs of wear or damage.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-65
for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This Non-Directional Tires
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
When rotating Goodyear Eagle RSA P245/45R18
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires non-directional tires, always use the correct
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. rotation pattern shown here.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See
When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-65 and
Wheel Replacement on page 5-70.

5-63
 After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
front and rear inflation pressures as shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56
and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-23.
Reset the Tire Pressure monitor System.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-59.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-99.

{CAUTION:
Directional Tires
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
If your vehicle has Goodyear Eagle F1-GS1 become loose after a time. The wheel
P245/45R18 size tires, they are directional tires could come off and cause a crash. When
and must roll in a certain direction for the you change a wheel, remove any rust or
best overall performance. The direction is shown dirt from places where the wheel attaches
by an arrow on the tire sidewall. Because these to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
tires are directional, they should be rotated as use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
shown here. These tires should only be moved but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
from front to rear and rear to front on the same later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
side of the vehicle. dirt off.

5-64
When It Is Time for New Tires • The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions • The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
influence when you need new tires. • The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
One way to tell when it is location of the damage.
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
indicators, which will not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
appear when your tires your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
have only 1/16 inch this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
(1.6 mm) or less of tread conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
remaining. proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.

You need new tires if any of the following statements

are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.

5-65
Buying New Tires GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet affect the braking and handling performance of your
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification vehicle. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-63
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement for information on proper tire rotation.
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
{CAUTION:
use, as the original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires)
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec could have a crash. Using tires of different
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire sizes, brands, or types may also cause
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS, for mud correct size, brand, and type of tires on your
and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-52 vehicle’s wheels.
for additional information.

5-66
 Different Size Tires and Wheels
{CAUTION: If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
after many miles of driving. A tire and/or has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,
wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. traction control, and stability control, the performance of
Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on these systems can be affected.
your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that

do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
{CAUTION:
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
vehicle’s original tires. may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if recommended for those wheels are selected.
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. You may increase the chance that you will crash
Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure and suffer serious injury. Only use Saturn
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning specific wheel and tire systems developed for
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. your vehicle, and have them properly installed
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-58. by a Saturn certified technician.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading See Buying New Tires on page 5-66 and Accessories
Your Vehicle on page 4-23, for more information about and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location
on your vehicle.

5-67
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
maximum section width. For example: under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
The following information relates to the system graded 100. The relative performance of tires
developed by the United States National Highway depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which however, and may depart significantly from
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
temperature performance. This applies only to practices, and differences in road characteristics
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are and climate.
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) Traction – AA, A, B, C
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
limited-production tires. measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
While the tires available on General Motors and concrete. A tire marked C may have
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with poor traction performance.
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional Warning: The traction grade assigned to this
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
standards. tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.

5-68
Temperature – A, B, C Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate longest tire life and best overall performance.
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
high temperature can cause the material of the tire you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive one side or the other, the alignment might need to
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels might
which all passenger car tires must meet under need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard for proper diagnosis.
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.

5-69
Wheel Replacement If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new Saturn
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts
the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be for your vehicle.
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist. with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel vehicle ground clearance, and tire clearance to
you need. the body and chassis.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces. {CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
{CAUTION: which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel could come off and cause a crash. When
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dangerous. It could affect the braking and dirt from places where the wheel attaches
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
air and make you lose control. You could have
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
a collision in which you or others could be later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel dirt off.
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.

5-70
 Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
{CAUTION: expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
Never use oil or grease on studs or the torque specification.
threads of the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel
nuts might come loose and the wheel could Used Replacement Wheels
fall off, causing a crash.

{CAUTION:
{CAUTION: Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
replace a wheel, use a new Saturn original
loose and even come off. This could lead to a
equipment wheel.
crash. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.
If you have to replace them, be sure to get new
Saturn original equipment wheel nuts.

5-71
Tire Chains If a Tire Goes Flat
Your vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit.
{CAUTION: See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 5-74.
There is no spare tire, no tire changing equipment, and
no place to store a tire.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are driving,
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without especially if you maintain your tires properly. See
the proper amount of clearance can cause Tires on page 5-50. If air goes out of a tire, it is much
damage to the brakes, suspension, or other more likely to leak out slowly. But, if you should
vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire ever have a blow out, here are a few tips about what to
chains could cause you to lose control of your expect and what to do:
vehicle and you or others may be injured in a If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
crash. Use another type of traction device only pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
if its manufacturer recommends it for use on accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
your vehicle and tire size combination and Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s a stop well out of the traffic lane.
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on the
rear tires.

5-72
A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts much like 3. Turn off the engine.
a skid and may require the same correction you 4. Inspect the flat tire.
would use in a skid. In any rear blow out, remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
under control by steering the way you want the vehicle damaged sidewalls, or has a puncture larger than a
1⁄4 inch (6 mm), the tire is too severely damaged for
to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can
still steer. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective.
if possible. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage If the tire has a puncture less than a 1⁄4 inch (6 mm)
by driving slowly to a level place and stopping. in the tread area of the tire, see Tire Sealant and
Then do this: Compressor Kit on page 5-74.
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
2. Park your vehicle. If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake firmly and put
the shift lever in PARK (P). See Shifting Into
PARK (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-25.
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, move
the shift lever to REVERSE (R) and set the parking
brake firmly. See Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
Transmission) on page 2-27 for additional
information.

5-73
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Your vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit that
is capable of temporarily sealing a puncture up to a
1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the tread of the tire. There is no

jack or spare tire. The kit inflates the tire with liquid
sealant and air. The tire sealant and compressor kit can
also be used to inflate an underinflated tire. After the
tire is inflated to the recommended inflation pressure,
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56 for more
information, the vehicle must be driven for five miles to
distribute the sealant in the tire and seal the puncture.
After driving five miles, the tire pressure must be
rechecked and adjusted as needed. See Using the
Tire Sealant and Compressor later in this section.
Be sure to read and follow all of the tire sealant and
compressor kit instructions. The kit includes the
following:
A. Air Compressor E. Air Pressure Gage
B. Tire Sealant Canister F. Air Compressor
C. Air Compressor Inflator Hose
Accessory Plug G. Sealant Filling Hose
D. On/Off Switch
After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant and
compressor kit, it is recommended to take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
If the sealant is not removed from the tire within
100 miles (161 kilometers) of driving, the dealer/retailer
may recommend that the tire be replaced.

5-74
Accessing the Tire Sealant and 4. Remove the tire
sealant and
Compressor Kit compressor kit strap by
To access the tire sealant and compressor kit, do the squeezing the two
following: tabs of the quick
release buckle.
1. Make sure the convertible top is in the up position
before accessing the tire sealant and compressor kit.
2. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-8 for more
information.

5. Remove the sealant and compressor kit from its

foam container.

3. Locate the tire sealant and compressor kit on the

driver side of the vehicle, near the back corner of
the trunk.

5-75
Tire Sealant Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the Kit to Temporarily Seal a Punctured Tire
sealant canister. Follow these directions closely for correct sealant usage.
The sealant can temporarily seal a punctures up to 1. Place the sealant and compressor kit on the ground
1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the tread area of the tire. The sealant
and unwrap the sealant filling hose from the
cannot seal sidewall damage, large punctures, or a compressor.
tire that has unseated from the wheel. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-7 if you need assistance. 2. Remove the air compressor accessory plug from
the unit. To do this, pull the top portion of the
The sealant can only be used to seal one tire. wrapped cord out first, then the bottom, and then
After usage, the sealant canister and sealant filling unsnap the plug. Do not insert the plug into an
hose assembly must be replaced at a dealer/retailer. accessory outlet yet.
See Removal and Installation of Sealant Canister later
in this section. 3. Remove the valve stem or tire pressure monitoring
sensor cap from the flat tire by turning it
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant counterclockwise.
canister, if it has expired, see your dealer/retailer for
a replacement. If an object, such as a nail, has penetrated the tire,
do not remove it.

5-76
 {CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
Exhaust on page 2-27.

6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine

(Key Access) on page 2-18 for more information.
The vehicle must be running while using the
air compressor.

{CAUTION:
4. Attach the sealant filling hose (A) onto the tire valve
Inflating something too much can make it
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Make sure the sealant and compressor kit on/off Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
switch (B) is in the O (off) position.
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C) into an Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See Accessory
Power Outlet(s) on page 3-16 for more information.
Do not slam door or close window on the
compressor accessory plug cord.

5-77
 7. Push the On/Off switch to the I (on) position. 10. Push the sealant and compressor kit switch to
The sealant and compressor kit injects sealant and the O (off) position.
air into the tire. Sealant could leak from the 11. The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air
puncture until the vehicle is driven and the puncture until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is
has sealed. distributed in the tire.
8. The pressure gage will initially show a high pressure Steps 12 through 20 must be done right after
while the compressor pushes the sealant into the Step 11.
tire. Once the sealant is completely dispersed in 12. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug from the
the tire, the pressure will quickly drop and start to accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
rise again as the tire inflates.
13. Disconnect the sealant filling hose from the tire
9. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and
pressure, found on the Tire and Loading Information replace the tire valve stem cap.
label located on the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar)
below the vehicle’s door latch, using the air Be careful when handling the tire inflator
pressure gage on the top of the unit. components as they could be hot after usage.
The pressure gage reads high while the compressor 14. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
is running. Turn the compressor off to get an compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
accurate pressure reading.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after 15 minutes, the vehicle should not be
driven. The tire is too severely damaged and
cannot be inflated or sealed with the tire sealant
and compressor kit. Remove the air compressor
accessory plug from the accessory power outlet and
unscrew the sealant filling hose from the tire
valve or tire pressure monitoring sensor valve.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.

5-78
15. Stow the air compressor accessory plug back in the
air compressor. To do this, wrap the air compressor
accessory plug, snap in the plug, and then push {CAUTION:
in the bottom and then the top of the wrapped
air compressor accessory plug. Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
16. If the flat tire was able other equipment in the passenger compartment
to inflate to the of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
recommended inflation stop or collision, loose equipment could strike
pressure, remove someone. Store the tire sealant and compressor
the maximum speed kit in the proper place.
label from the sealant
canister.
17. Return the equipment to the proper storage location
in the trunk of your vehicle. You might need to
loosen the retention strap to wrap it around
the sealant and compressor kit and foam container.
To do this, pull apart the strap and loosen the
Place it in a highly visible location such as the strap at the quick release buckle. Then snap the
inside of the upper left corner of the windshield or buckle together, pull the strap tight, and secure the
to the face of the radio/clock. loose end of the strap by mating the ends.
The maximum speed label reminds you to drive 18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until distribute the sealant evenly in the tire.
you have the damaged tire inspected and repaired.

5-79
19. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure, Using the Air Compressor without
refer to Steps 1 through 8 under “Using the Air
Compressor without Sealant” next in this section. Sealant to Inflate an Underinflated Tire
If the tire pressure has fallen more then (Not Punctured)
10 psi (68 kPa), below the recommended inflation
pressure, stop driving the vehicle. The tire is To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
too severely damaged and the tire sealant and and not sealant, do the following:
compressor cannot seal the tire. See Roadside 1. Remove the air compressor inflating hose connector
Assistance Program on page 7-7 for more from the bottom of the air compressor.
information.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, inflate the tire back up to the
recommended inflation pressure.
20. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire, and
vehicle with a rag.
21. Dispose of the sealant canister at a local
dealer/retailer or in accordance with local state
codes and practices.
After using the sealant canister, replace it with a
new canister from your dealer/retailer.
22. After temporarily sealing a tire with the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer to have the tire inspected and 2. Unlock the air compressor hose from the sealant
repaired. canister by pulling up on the lever.

5-80
3. Pull the air compressor inflator hose from the
sealant canister.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the tire
{CAUTION:
valve stem and push the lever down to secure in
place. Inflating something too much can make it
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug into an explode, and you or others could be injured.
accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-16 for more inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
information. Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).

7. Push the sealant and compressor kit switch to

{CAUTION: the I (on) position.
8. Inflate the tire up to the recommended inflation
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with pressure using the air pressure gage on the top
the climate control system off can cause of the unit.
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine The pressure gage reads high while the compressor
Exhaust on page 2-27. is running. Turn the compressor off to get an
accurate reading. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-56 for more information.
6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine
(Key Access) on page 2-18 for more information. 9. Turn off the air compressor by moving the switch to
The vehicle must be running while using the the O (off) position.
air compressor.

5-81
 Removal and Installation of the Sealant
{CAUTION: Canister
To remove the sealant canister, do the following:
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could cause injury.
In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire sealant
and compressor kit in the proper place.

10. Disconnect the compressor inflator hose and wrap

the hose in the bottom of the sealant and
compressor kit.
11. Place the equipment in the original location in the
trunk of your vehicle.

1. Unlock the air compressor inflator hose from the

sealant canister by pulling the lever up.
2. Disconnect the air compressor inflator hose from
the sealant canister.
3. Unwrap the sealant filling hose from the
compressor.

5-82
 To install a new sealant canister, do the following:
1. Align the sealant filling hose with the slot in the
air compressor.
2. Push the sealant canister down and turn it
clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the
sealant canister inlet and push the lever down.

4. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator filling hose

is aligned with the slot in the compressor.
5. Lift the sealant canister from the compressor and
replace with a new sealant canister. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.

5-83
Appearance Care Use glass cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent
over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Interior Cleaning Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
that could cause stains to set rapidly. your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments using a small brush with soft bristles.
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior. Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned. odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners
on surfaces for which they were not intended.

5-84
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners Fabric/Carpet
or techniques:
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
remove a soil from any interior surface. vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
your vehicle’s interior surfaces. try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively possible using one of the following techniques:
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the • For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
effectiveness of soil removal. towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. • For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
Using too much soap will leave a residue that then vacuum.
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, To clean, use the following instructions:
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide. 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning. 2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from 3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
alcohol, etc.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.

5-85
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a Other Plastic Surfaces
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
may result, clean the entire surface. remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
fabric or carpet. commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
Leather permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to or wax-based products, or those containing organic
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use a non-uniform manner.
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
to preserve and protect leather may permanently difficult to see through the windshield under certain
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are conditions.
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.

5-86
Care of Safety Belts Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry. The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
{CAUTION: damage the emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, that is should not be used on plastic parts, do not
it may severely weaken them. In a crash, use it on your vehicle or damage may occur and
they might not be able to provide adequate it would not be covered by the warranty.
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a
soap and lukewarm water. car washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on your
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
Weatherstrips from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-92. Follow all manufacturers’
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, vehicle care product.
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

5-87
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain. basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
paint finish.
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
page 5-87. are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Finish Care Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
whenever possible.
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-92.

5-88
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Convertible Top
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep The vehicle’s convertible top should be cleaned often.
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually However, high pressure car washes may cause water to
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on enter your vehicle.
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
When you hand wash the top, do it in partial shade.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging Use a mild soap, lukewarm water and a soft sponge.
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, A chamois or cloth may leave lint on the top, and
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of a brush can chafe the threads in the top fabric. Do not
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all use detergents, harsh cleaners, solvents or bleaching
bright metal parts. agents.
Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly to avoid
Windshield and Wiper Blades spots or rings. Let the soap remain on the fabric for
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner. a few minutes. When the top is really dirty, use a mild
foam-type cleaner. Thoroughly rinse the entire
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or vehicle, then let the top dry in direct sunlight.
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly To protect the convertible top:
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a • After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top is
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause completely dry before you lower it.
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged. • Do not get any cleaner on the vehicle’s painted
finish; it could leave streaks.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• If you decide to go through an automatic car wash,
• Extreme dusty conditions ask the manager if the equipment could damage
• Sand and salt your top.
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal

5-89
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
and Trim chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or them because you could damage the surface. Do not
chrome-plated wheels. use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
be applied.
chrome wheels only.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
driving on roads that have been sprayed with immediately after application.
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
with soap and water after exposure. cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals, be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
wheels, you could damage the surface of the carbide tire cleaning brushes.
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.

5-90
Tires Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
products on your vehicle may damage the paint underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
always wipe off any overspray from all painted protection.
surfaces on your vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
Sheet Metal Damage and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or can do this for you.
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the Chemical Paint Spotting
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty. Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
Finish Damage attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode paint surface.
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer. new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop. whichever occurs first.

5-91
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials Description Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
Description Usage Swirl Remover Polish scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior
Wax-Treated polishing cloth. Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Tar and Road Removes tar, road oil and
Oil Remover asphalt. Cleans, shines and
Foaming Tire Shine protects in one easy step,
Chrome Cleaner Use on chrome or Low Gloss
no wiping necessary.
and Polish stainless steel.
Medium foaming
Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl. shampoo. Cleans and
Convertible Top Cleaner Cleans convertible tops. Wash Wax Concentrate lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
Convertible Top Protector Protects convertible tops. phosphate free.
Removes dirt, grime, Quickly and easily
Glass Cleaner smoke and fingerprints.
Spot Lifter removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
Chrome and Wire Removes dirt and grime cloth upholstery.
Wheel Cleaner from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers. Odorless spray odor
Odor Eliminator eliminator used on fabrics,
Removes dust, vinyl, leather and carpet.
fingerprints, and surface
Finish Enhancer contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.

5-92
Vehicle Identification Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification Label

This label is on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
The label has the following information:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on • Model designation
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. You can see it if you look through • Paint information
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also • Production options and special equipment
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration. Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

5-93
Electrical System Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Add-On Electrical Equipment Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your windows and other power accessories. When the current
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
first. Some electrical equipment can damage closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
your vehicle and the damage would not be covered goes away.
by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as they Fuses and Circuit Breakers
should.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even short circuits by a combination of J-Case fuses,
if your vehicle is not operating. mini-fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-48. band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
Headlamp Wiring size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuse
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turn
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring
that you can get along without – like the radio or
checked right away.
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.

5-94
Floor Console Fuse Block Fuses Usage
The floor console fuse block is located on the passenger 1 Fuse Puller
side of the vehicle under the carpet. 2 Empty
Remove the fuse block cover to access the fuses. 3 Empty
Use the fuse puller to remove fuses.
4 Empty
After re-installing the fuse block cover, be sure to tuck 5 Empty
the carpet under the heater floor outlets.
6 Amplifier
7 Cluster
8 Ignition Switch, PassKey III+
9 Stoplamp

10 Climate Control System,

PassKey III+
11 Empty
12 Spare
13 Airbag
14 Spare
15 Wiper
Climate Control System, Automatic
16 Occupant Sensing Module, Crank
Relay, Instrument Panel Cluster

5-95
 Fuses Usage Underhood Fuse Block
17 Empty The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
18 Empty compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle.
19 Steering Wheel Controls Lift the cover for access to the fuse block.
20 Spare Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
21 Spare covers on any electrical component.
22 Empty To remove fuses, use the fuse puller, or hold the end of
23 Radio the fuse between your thumb and index finger and
pull straight out.
24 Sensing and Diagnostic Module
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
Engine Control Module, more information on location.
25 Transmission Control Module
26 Door Locks
27 Interior Lamps
28 Steering Wheel Control Backlighting
29 Power Windows
30 Climate Control System
31 Empty
32 Retained Accessory Power

5-96
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
1 Empty (LE5); Cooling Fan (LNF) 22 Air Conditioning
2 Rear Window Defogger 23 Empty
3 Empty Cooling Fan 2 Relay (LE5);
24 Empty (LNF)
4 Body Control Module 3
5 Crank 25 Fuse Puller
6 Body Control Module 2 26 Powertrain Relay
27 Empty
7 Body Control Module
Back-up Lamps Relay
8 Cooling Fan 2 (LE5); Empty (LNF) 28 (Automatic Transmission);
9 Empty Empty (Manual Transmission)
10 Trunk 29 Data Link Connector
11 Trunk 30 Outlet
12 Empty Back-up Lamps
31 (Automatic Transmission);
13 Fuel Pump Empty (Manual Transmission)
14 Rear Defogger Relay 32 Empty
15 Air Conditioning Clutch Relay
33 Emissions
16 Empty
34 Crank Relay
17 Empty 35 Empty
18 Trunk Release Relay
36 Empty
19 Fuel Pump Relay 37 Power Seat
20 Empty 38 Empty
21 Mirrors

5-97
 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
39 Empty 55 Horn Relay
40 Cooling Fan 1 (LE5); Empty (LNF) 56 S Band, OnStar®, Remote Keyless
Entry System
Empty (LE5); Turbo,
41 Cam Phaser (LNF) 57 Antilock Brake System
42 Engine Control Module 58 Wiper Diode
43 Engine Control Module, Transmission 59 Windshield Wiper
44 Antilock Brake System 60 Horn
Injectors, Ignition Coils (LE5); 61 Antilock Brake System
45 Ignition Coils (LNF) 62 Instrument Panel Ignition
Back-up Lamps 63 Driver Side High Beam
46 (Manual Transmission);
Empty (Automatic Transmission) 64 Canister Vent
47 Empty 65 Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
48 Daytime Running Lamps Relay 66 Passenger Side Low-Beam Headlamp
49 Daytime Running Lamps 67 Passenger Side High-Beam Headlamp

50 Cooling Fan 1 Relay (LE5); 68 Parking Lamps Relay

Empty (LNF) 69 Parking Lamps
51 Run/Crank Relay 70 Windshield Wiper On/Off Relay
52 Windshield Wiper Low/High Relay 71 Low-Beam Headlamp Relay
53 Fog Lamps 72 High-Beam Headlamp Relay
54 Fog Lamps Relay

5-98
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.

Capacities
Application
English Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for
more information.
Cooling System
2.0L L4 Engine Automatic 9.2 qt 8.7 L
2.0L L4 Engine Manual 9.5 qt 9.0 L
2.4L L4 Engine Automatic 8.7 qt 8.2 L
2.4L L4 Engine Manual 8.9 qt 8.4 L
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L L4 and 2.4L L4 5.0 qt 4.7 L
Fuel Tank 13.6 gal 51.5 L
Transmission, Automatic (Complete Drain and Refill) 9.0 qt 8.5 L
Transmission, Manual (Complete Drain and Refill) 2.75 qt 2.6 L
Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual.

5-99
 Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
Automatic
2.0L L4 X 0.035 inch (0.9mm)
Manual
Automatic
2.4L L4 B 0.040 inch (1.01 mm)
Manual

5-100
 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2 At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8
Introduction ...................................................6-2 At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2 At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-14
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-14
Additional Required Services ............................6-6 Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-15
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7 Maintenance Record .....................................6-16
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8

6-1
Maintenance Schedule Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
Introduction condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and times a week. Or you might drive long distances all the
change as recommended. time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work,
Maintenance Requirements to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and frequent checks and replacements. So please read
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are the following and note how you drive. If you have any
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow see your dealer/retailer.
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty. This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
Your Vehicle and the Environment limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your Vehicle on page 4-23.
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the • are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
environment. All recommended maintenance is driving limits.
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid • use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of on page 5-5.
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

6-2
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
should be performed when indicated. See Additional unless you are technically qualified and have the
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance necessary equipment, you should have your
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information. dealer/retailer do these jobs.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
{CAUTION: technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15.
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you what
can be seriously injured. Do your own should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
maintenance work only if you have the easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
required know-how and the proper tools and
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
see your dealer/retailer to have a qualified on page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
technician do the work. See Doing Your Own Parts on page 6-14. When your vehicle is serviced,
Service Work on page 5-4. make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.

6-3
Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message on the Driver Required services are described in the following for
Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means that “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
service is required for your vehicle. See DIC Warnings it is recommended that your first service be
and Messages on page 3-41. Have your vehicle Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
serviced as soon as possible within the next and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life may be required more often.
system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
for over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be OIL SOON message comes on within 10 months since
changed at least once a year and at this time the system the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service performed.
technicians who will perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system. Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, Maintenance II whenever the CHANGE OIL SOON
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles message comes on 10 months or more since the last
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset service or if the message has not come on at all for
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See one year.
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.

6-4
 Scheduled Maintenance
Service Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. Reset oil life system.
• •
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19. An Emission Control Service.
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
•
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21. See footnote (h).
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
• •
Rotation on page 5-63 and At Least Once a Month on page 6-9.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels. Add fluid as needed. • •
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
• •
this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •

6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
• • • • • •
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
• • •
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
Change automatic transmission fluid
• • •
(severe service). See footnote (k).
Change automatic transmission fluid
•
(normal service).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
•
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
•
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. •
See footnote (g).

6-6
Maintenance Footnotes (e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper other loose or damaged safety belt system parts.
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking the
cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums, Restraint Systems on page 1-50.
wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. (f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all hinges
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and and latches, including those for the body doors, hood,
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, rear
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses compartment, glove box door, and console door. More
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a
corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts
as needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure (g) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser (h) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
is recommended at least once a year. the filter at each engine oil change.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or (i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-24
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
on page 5-49 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
page 5-89 for more information. the cooling system and pressure cap.

6-7
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a At Each Fuel Fill
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed. It is important to perform these underhood checks at
(k) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the each fuel fill.
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these Engine Oil Level Check
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
− In hilly or mountainous terrain. damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service. Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.

Owner Checks and Services Engine Coolant Level Check

These owner checks and services should be performed Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
dependability, and emission control performance of your on page 5-24.
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
checks and services.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your necessary.
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

6-8
At Least Once a Month 3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in
any other position, contact your dealer/retailer
Inspect your vehicle’s tires for wear and make sure they for service.
are inflated to the correct pressures. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-56. On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal down halfway,
and try to start the engine. The vehicle should start
At Least Once a Year only when the clutch pedal is pushed down all the
way to the floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch
Starter Switch Check pedal is not pushed all the way down, contact your
dealer/retailer for service.

{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room

around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-24.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

6-9
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Ignition Transmission Lock Check
Control System Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• With an automatic transmission, the ignition
{CAUTION: should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift lever
is in PARK (P). The ignition key should come
When you are doing this inspection, the out only in LOCK/OFF.
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle • With a manual transmission, the ignition key should
moves, you or others could be injured. come out only in LOCK/OFF.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room It should only lock when turned to the right.
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-24.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves
out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.

6-10
Parking Brake and Automatic Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill.
Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism parking brake.
Check • To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
{CAUTION: pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle • To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
could begin to move. You or others could be With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
injured and property could be damaged. Make release the parking brake followed by the
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in regular brake.
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move. Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.

6-11
Recommended Fluids and Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Lubricants 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part See Engine Coolant on
number, or specification can be obtained from your page 5-24.
dealer/retailer.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
Usage Fluid/Lubricant System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

Engine oil which meets GM Standard Hydraulic Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
GM6094M and displays the Clutch System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Engine Oil American Petroleum Institute
Power Steering GM
Power Steering Fluid
(2.4L L4 Certified for Gasoline Engines (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
engine) starburst symbol. To determine the System
in Canada 89021186).
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-15. Windshield Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Washer
The engine requires a special engine
oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M. Manual Transmission Fluid
Oils meeting this standard can be Manual
Transmission (GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,
identified with the American in Canada 89021807).
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Engine Oil Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Automatic DEXRON®-VI Automatic
(2.0L L4 However, not all synthetic API oils Transmission Transmission Fluid.
engine)
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. Look for and use Key Lock Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
only an oil that meets GM Standard Cylinders (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
GM4718M. For the proper viscosity, in Canada 10953474).
see Engine Oil on page 5-15.

6-12
 Usage Fluid/Lubricant Usage Fluid/Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Hood Latch
Axle Lubricant Assembly, Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
Rear Axle (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, Secondary (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 89021678) meeting Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
GM Specification 9986115. Spring meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Anchor, and Category LB or GC-LB.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Release Pawl
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
in Canada 89021678) meeting Hood and (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Door Hinges
Rear Axle GM Specification 9986115. in Canada 10953474).
(Limited-Slip With a complete drain and refill
Differential) add 4 ounces (118 ml) of Weatherstrip Lubricant
Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358, Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
in Canada 992694) where required. Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease
See Rear Axle on page 5-44. (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Chassis Lubricant
Chassis (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
Lubrication in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.

6-13
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

ACDelco® Part
Part Part Number
Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
2.0L L4 Engine 15925738 A3084C
2.4L L4 Engine 15287103 A3076C
2.0L and 2.4L Engine Oil Filter 12605566 PF457G
Spark Plugs
2.0L L4 Engine 12617309 41-108
2.4L L4 Engine 12598004 41-103
Windshield Wiper Blade (Hook Type)
Driver’s Side —16 inches (40 cm) 10344209 —
Passenger’s Side — 22 inches (55 cm) 10344210 —

6-14
Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.0L and 2.4L L4 Engines

6-15
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

6-16
 Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

6-17
 Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

6-18
 Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2 Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-14
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Online Owner Center ......................................7-4 United States Government ..........................7-14
Customer Assistance for Text Reporting Safety Defects to the
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-5 Canadian Government ................................7-14
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-6 Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn ..................7-14
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-6 Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-15
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-7 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-16
Scheduling Service Appointments .....................7-9 Event Data Recorders ...................................7-16
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-9 OnStar® ......................................................7-17
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-11 Navigation System ........................................7-17
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-17

7-1
Customer Assistance and STEP TWO: Should you need additional assistance, in
the U.S., contact the Saturn Customer Assistance
Information Center by calling 1-800-553-6000. In Canada, contact
the Saturn Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer Assistance Center
Customer Satisfaction Procedure team member will handle your call and assist in
providing product and warranty information, the nearest
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your retailer location, roadside assistance, brochures,
retailer and to Saturn. Together we are committed to literature and discuss any concerns you may have.
providing our customers with unparalleled service,
before, during, and after the purchase of a Saturn vehicle, We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
for total customer satisfaction. We call this the Saturn to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
Difference. Normally, any concerns with the sales following information available to give the Customer
transaction or the operation of your vehicle are resolved Assistance Representative:
by your retailer’s sales or service departments. If, for any • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This 17-digit
reason, your ownership experience falls below your
number can be found on the vehicle registration or
expectations, we suggest you take the following action:
title, on the upper driver side corner of the dash, or
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer Assistance on your roadside assistance key card.
Liaison. Any member of the retail management team has • The name of your selling and servicing retail facility.
the authority and the desire to resolve your concerns.
Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at this level. • Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.
When contacting Saturn, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.

7-2
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and This program is available in all 50 states and the District
its retailers are committed to making sure you are of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage
completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle. However, and other factors. Saturn Corporation reserves the right
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, Saturn and its participation in this program.
retailers offer the additional assistance of a neutral party
through our voluntary participation in a mediation/ STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
arbitration program called Better Business Bureau (BBB) General Motors Participation in the
Auto Line.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus In the event that you do not feel your concerns have
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or been addressed after following the procedure outlined in
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limited has
This program is available at no cost to you, our customer. committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The
Although you may be required to resort to this informal program provides for the review of the facts involved by
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
use of the program is free of charge and your case is informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
generally heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
the decision given in your case, you can reject it and
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
should be completed in approximately 70 days. We
Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using the toll-free believe our impartial program offers advantages over
telephone number or by writing them at the following courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
address: and free of charge.
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
7-3
For further information concerning eligibility in the Online Owner Center
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you may Online Owner Center
call the Saturn Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-1999, or you may write to: (United States only)
Mediation/Arbitration Program The Owner Center is a resource for your Saturn
c/o Customer Communication Centre ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can be
General Motors of Canada Limited found in one place.
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive The Online Owner Center allows you to:
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 • Get e-mail service reminders.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 • Access information about your specific vehicle,
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your Vehicle including tips and videos and an electronic
Identification Number (VIN). version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.

7-4
My GM Canada (Canada only) Customer Assistance for Text
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of Telephone (TTY) Users
gmcanada.com where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools To assist owners who have hearing difficulties, Saturn
and forms with greater ease. has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices
for the Deaf) equipment in its Saturn Customer
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you Assistance Center.
will have access to:
Any hearing- or speech-impaired customer who has
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
access to a TDD or to a conventional Text Telephone
vehicles and current offers in your area.
(TTY) can communicate with Saturn by dialing
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users in Canada may dial
address and phone number for each of your 1-800-263-3830.
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining your
vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with
greater ease.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.

7-5
Customer Assistance Offices GM Mobility Reimbursement
Saturn encourages customers to call the toll-free Program
number for assistance. If a customer wishes to write to
Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Code 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
1-800-553-6000
1-800-833-6000 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
In Canada, write to: reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
Saturn Customer Communication Centre driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may
General Motors of Canada Ltd. require for your vehicle such as hand controls,
CA1-163-005 wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
The offer is available for a limited period of time from
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-1999 For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the Saturn
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800 Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.
In Canada, customers may call the Saturn Customer
Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999. TTY users in
Canada may call 1-800-263-3830.

7-6
Roadside Assistance Program • Lock-out Service: Lock-out service is covered at no
charge if you are unable to gain entry into your
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call 1-800-553-6000; vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if you
(Text Telephone (TTY): 1-800-889-2438). have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800. security, the driver must present personal
identification before lock-out service is provided. In
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
As the owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you are • Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
automatically enrolled in the Saturn Roadside Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturn retailer for
Assistance Program. warranty service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling
crash. Winch-out assistance is provided when the
Who is Covered? vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle • Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner is covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
not eligible for coverage. for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
Services Provided
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
The following services are provided in the U.S. and charge if the vehicle does not start.
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km), • Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon request,
whichever comes first, and, in Canada only, up
Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
to a maximum of $100. computer personalized maps, highlighting your
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the choice of either the most direct route or the most
vehicle to get to the nearest service station scenic route to your destination, anywhere in North
(approximately $5 Canada). In Canada, service to America, along with helpful travel information
provide diesel may be restricted. For safety reasons, pertaining to your trip.
propane and other alternative fuels are not provided Please allow three weeks before your planned
through this service. departure date. Trip routing requests are limited to
six per calendar year.

7-7
 • Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty related However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty
vehicle disablement, while en route and over repairs are the responsibility of the driver.
250 kilometres from the original point of departure, Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
you might qualify for trip interruption expense the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims become
reimbursement of up to a maximum of excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night), and Calling for Assistance
(C) alternate ground transportation (maximum of
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
$40/day). This benefit is to assist you with some of
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
the unplanned expense you may incur while waiting
Representatives:
for your vehicle to be repaired.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a • Your name, home address, and home telephone
copy of the repair order are required. number
Once authorization has been given, your advisor will • Telephone number of your location
help you make any necessary arrangements and • Location of the vehicle
explain how to claim for trip interruption expense
assistance. • Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There could be
times when Roadside Assistance cannot provide • Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to (VIN) and delivery date of the vehicle
secure local emergency road service, and you will be • Description of the problem
reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Roadside Assistance.

7-8
Towing and Road Service Exclusions If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance in the work day as possible to allow for the same
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated day repair.
on a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound
towing caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,
Provincial or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or Courtesy Transportation
changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices. To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the participating retailers are proud to offer Courtesy
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
the right to make any changes or discontinue the period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
Roadside Assistance program at any time without in both the U.S. and Canada.
notification. Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
Scheduling Service Appointments repairs are required.
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment. By Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
scheduling a service appointment and advising your and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
service consultant of your transportation needs, your each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience. information.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.

7-9
Transportation Options Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while you Your retailer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, Saturn helps rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited and must be
your retailer can offer you one of the following: supported by original receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement and meet state/
Shuttle Service provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering Requirements vary and may include minimum age
Courtesy Transportation. Retailers may provide you with requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
shuttle service to get you to your destination with You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of the
time and distance parameters of the retailer’s area. repair.
Public Transportation or Fuel It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
Reimbursement courtesy rental.
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and Additional Program Information
public transportation is used instead of the retailer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum available at every retailer. Please contact your retailer
amount allowed by Saturn for shuttle service. In addition, for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation Transportation arrangements will be administered by
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for appropriate retailer personnel.
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by Saturn reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change
original receipts. See your retailer for information or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the
fuel or other transportation costs. terms and conditions described herein at its sole
discretion.

7-10
Collision Damage Repair originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known. Such
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by that
technician using the proper equipment and quality warranty.
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety made by companies other than GM and may not have
performance can be compromised in subsequent been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
collisions. fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
Collision Parts and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
the same materials and construction methods as the to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
parts with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine
GM Collision parts are your best choice to assure that Repair Facility
your vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can facility that meets your needs before you ever need
help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty. collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections and comparable equipment.
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s

7-11
Insuring Your Vehicle If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There • Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
are significant differences in the quality of coverage right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
companies will not specify aftermarket collision matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that only if its position puts you in danger or you are
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM instructed to move it by a police officer.
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance • Give only the necessary and requested information
coverage is not available from your current insurance to police and other parties involved in the crash.
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier. Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with help guard against post-crash legal action.
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) • If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end page 7-7 for more information.
of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.

7-12
• Gather the important information you will need from Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone Process
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and GM recommends that you take an active role in its
policy number, and a general description of the repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
damage to the other vehicle. choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the Specify to the facility that any required replacement
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
information they will need. If they ask for a police Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
report, phone or go to the police department Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of GM vehicle warranty.
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
necessary. This is especially true if there are no insurance company may initially value the repair
injuries and both vehicles are drivable. using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
their work for a long time. repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
make sure you understand what work will be that company. In such cases, you can have control of
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question, the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome reasonable limits.
this opportunity.

7-13
Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
United States Government has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
could cause a crash or could cause injury or write to:
death, you should immediately inform the National Transport Canada
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), Road Safety Branch
in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation. 2780 Sheffield Road
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it could Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it could Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn
order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
problems between you, your retailer or Saturn a situation like this, please notify Saturn.
Corporation. Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:
To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline Saturn Corporation
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); 100 Saturn Parkway
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Mail Drop 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW. In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, or write:
Washington D.C., 20590 Saturn Customer Communication Centre
You can also obtain other information about motor General Motors of Canada Limited
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

7-14
Service Publications Ordering In Canada, information relating to product service
bulletins can be obtained by contacting your Saturn
Information retailer.

Service Manuals Service Bulletins

A variety of publications are available to you. Saturn Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service
service manuals are written for trained technicians, and bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors product
in some cases, specialized tools and equipment are performance in the field. We then prepare bulletins for
necessary to complete certain repairs. However, the servicing our products better. You can get these
manuals are available to owners who either have the bulletins, too.
training, or wish to gain a greater understanding of the Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the
technical aspect of their Saturn. proper use and care of your vehicle. Some describe
For additional publications information or to order costly repairs. Others describe inexpensive repairs
publications in the United States, call toll free which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoid
1-800-2-SATURN or visit www.saturn-publications.com future costly repairs.
to order on-line. Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new or
In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available by unexpected condition. Others describe a quicker way to
calling toll free 1-800-551-4123. fix your vehicle. They can help a technician service your
vehicle better.
Owner Publications Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small
Information on how to obtain product bulletins and as number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or a qualified
described below is applicable only in the fifty U.S. states technician may have to determine if a specific bulletin
and the District of Columbia, and only for cars and light applies to your vehicle. To order Saturn bulletins, call
trucks with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) less Saturn Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies of individual www.saturn-publications.com to order online.
bulletins are also at your participating Saturn retailer.
You can ask to see them.

7-15
Vehicle Data Recording and Event Data Recorders
Privacy This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
Your Saturn vehicle has a number of sophisticated crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
computers that record information about the vehicle’s deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
performance and how it is driven. For example, your assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may • How various systems in your vehicle were operating
store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel belts were buckled/fastened
consumption or average speed. These modules may also • How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
accelerator and/or brake pedal
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.

7-16
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is Navigation System
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special system may result in the storage of destinations,
equipment, can read the information if they have addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
access to the vehicle or the EDR. information. Refer to the navigation system operating
Saturn will not access this data or share it with others manual for information on stored data and for deletion
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the instructions.
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar Radio Frequency Identification
government office; as part of Saturn’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law. (RFID)
Data that Saturn collects or receives may also be used for
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
Saturn research needs or may be made available to
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
others for research purposes, where a need is shown and
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
OnStar® openers. RFID technology in Saturn vehicles does not
use or record personal information or link with any other
If your vehicle has OnStar® and you subscribe to the Saturn system containing personal information.
OnStar® services, please refer to the OnStar®
Terms and Conditions for information on data collection
and use. See also OnStar® System on page 2-30 in
this manual for more information.

7-17
✍ NOTES

7-18
 A Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-90
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3 Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-87
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-91
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-48 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-88
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6 Convertible Top ........................................... 5-89
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-94 Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-85
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-21 Finish Care ................................................. 5-88
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-17 Finish Damage ............................................ 5-91
Airbag Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-25 Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-86
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-24 Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-84
Airbag System ................................................ 1-36 Leather ...................................................... 5-86
What Will You See After an Airbag Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-91
Inflates? .................................................. 1-42 Tires .......................................................... 5-91
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-40 Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-91
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-38 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-92
Airbag Systems Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-87
Adding Equipment to Your Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-87
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 1-48 Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-89
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-41 Appointments, Scheduling Service ....................... 7-9
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-43 Ashtray ......................................................... 3-16
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-48 Audio System ................................................. 3-50
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-41 Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-71
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-72 Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-72
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna Radio Reception .......................................... 3-71
System ...................................................... 3-72 Setting the Time .......................................... 3-51
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-4 Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-70
Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ................ 3-28 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 3-72

1
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-54
Automatic Door Lock ......................................... 2-7 C
Automatic Transmission California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
Fluid .......................................................... 5-23 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ....... 5-4
Operation ................................................... 2-20 California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications ............................ 5-99
B Carbon Monoxide ..................... 2-8, 2-27, 4-18, 4-28
Care of
Battery .......................................................... 5-38 Safety Belts ................................................ 5-87
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-15 CD, MP3 ....................................................... 3-64
Brake Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-33
Emergencies ................................................ 4-5 Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-72
Brakes .......................................................... 5-35 Charging System Light .................................... 3-27
System Warning Light .................................. 3-27 Check
Braking ........................................................... 4-3 Engine Light ............................................... 3-32
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5 Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-16 Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-91
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-44 Child Restraints
Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-47 Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-29
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps ..... 5-46 Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-26
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-45 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-31
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-44 Older Children ............................................. 1-22
Headlamps and Parking Lamps ..................... 5-45 Securing a Child Restraint in the
License Plate Lamps .................................... 5-48 Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-32
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-48 Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-16
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Sidemarker Lamps ............................. 5-46
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-66

2
Cleaning Coolant
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-90 Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-30
Convertible Top ........................................... 5-89 Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-30
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-88 Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-26
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-85 Cooling System .............................................. 5-28
Finish Care ................................................. 5-88 Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-33
Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-86 Customer Assistance Information
Interior ....................................................... 5-84 Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-9
Leather ...................................................... 5-86 Customer Assistance for Text
Tires .......................................................... 5-91 Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-5
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-91 Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-6
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-87 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-87 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-6
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-89 Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn ................ 7-14
Climate Control System ................................... 3-17 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-20 Canadian Government .............................. 7-14
Clock ............................................................ 3-51 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-23 United States Government ......................... 7-14
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-11 Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-7
Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant ............................ 5-74 Service Publications Ordering
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-12 Information .............................................. 7-15
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3
Convertible Top .............................................. 2-34

3
 D E
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-14 EDR ............................................................. 7-16
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2 Electrical System
Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-7 Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-94
Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 3-64 Floor Console Fuse Block ............................. 5-95
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-94
Door Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-94
Automatic Door Lock ..................................... 2-7 Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-94
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-7 Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-96
Locks .......................................................... 2-6 Electronic Stability Control ................................. 4-8
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-6 Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light ........... 3-29
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .............. 2-7 Engine
Driver Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-21
Seat Height Adjuster ...................................... 1-2 Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-32
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-38 Coolant ...................................................... 5-24
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-38 Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-30
DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-45 Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-15
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-41 Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Driving Exhaust ..................................................... 2-27
At Night ..................................................... 4-15 Oil ............................................................. 5-15
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-16 Oil Life System ........................................... 5-19
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2 Overheating ................................................ 5-26
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2 Reduced Power Light ................................... 3-36
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-16 Running While Parked .................................. 2-28
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-17 Starting ...................................................... 2-18
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-15 Entry/Exit Lighting ........................................... 3-15
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-22 Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-16
Winter ........................................................ 4-18 Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-22

4
 F G
Filter Gage
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-21 Fuel .......................................................... 3-37
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-91 Speedometer .............................................. 3-22
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-72 Tachometer ................................................. 3-22
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6 Gasoline
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8 Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-72 Specifications ............................................... 5-6
Fluid ............................................................. 5-23 Glove Box ..................................................... 2-33
Power Steering ........................................... 5-33 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-6
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-34
Fog Lamp
Fog ........................................................... 3-14
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-35
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Headlamp
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
Aiming ....................................................... 5-44
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-94
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Headlamps .................................................... 3-13
Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-8
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-44
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-14
Gage ......................................................... 3-37
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps ..... 5-46
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-45
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-37
Headlamps and Parking Lamps ..................... 5-45
Fuses
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
Floor Console Fuse Block ............................. 5-95
On Reminder .............................................. 3-13
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-94
Heater ........................................................... 3-17
Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-96

5
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-2
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-36 K
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-16 Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-17 Keys ............................................................... 2-2
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-52
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-11 Lamps
Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-23 Mirror Reading ............................................ 3-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-19
LATCH System
I Child Restraints ........................................... 1-31
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-16 Latches, Seatback ............................................ 1-5
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-26 License Plate Lamps ....................................... 5-48
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-56 Light
Inflator Kit, Tire ............................................... 5-74 Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-24
Instrument Panel Antilock Brake System Warning ..................... 3-28
Overview ..................................................... 3-4 Brake System Warning ................................. 3-27
Instrument Panel (I/P) Charging System ......................................... 3-27
Brightness .................................................. 3-15 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-30
Cluster ....................................................... 3-21 Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-35
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-36
Low Coolant Warning ................................... 3-30
J Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-37
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-32
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-39 Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-35

6
Light (cont.)
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-25 M
Reduced Engine Power ................................ 3-36 Maintenance Schedule
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-23 Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
Security ..................................................... 3-35 At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-31 At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
Trunk Ajar .................................................. 3-36 At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9
Lighting Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Entry/Exit ................................................... 3-15 Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Lights ............................................................ 3-13 Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8 Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-14
On Reminder .............................................. 3-13 Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ....................................... 4-8 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-23 Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Lockout Protection ............................................ 2-8 Using .......................................................... 6-2
Locks Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Automatic Door Lock ..................................... 2-7 Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-32
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-7 Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Door ........................................................... 2-6 Manual Transmission
Lockout Protection ......................................... 2-8 Fluid .......................................................... 5-23
Power Door .................................................. 2-6 Operation ................................................... 2-23
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .............. 2-7 Manual, Using .................................................... iii
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-13 Message
Low Coolant Warning Light .............................. 3-30 DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-41
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-37 Mirror Reading Lamps ..................................... 3-15

7
Mirrors Outlets
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-29 Accessory Power ......................................... 3-16
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ............. 2-29 Outside
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-29 Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-29
MP3 ............................................................. 3-64 Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-4 Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii

N P
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-17 Paint, Damage ............................................... 5-91
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-16 Park Brake .................................................... 2-24
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-14 Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-25
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-26
O Parking
Odometer ...................................................... 3-22 Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-27
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-13 Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-27
Oil Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-25
Engine ....................................................... 5-15 Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-43
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-35 Passing ......................................................... 4-13
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-19 PASS-Key® III+ .............................................. 2-14
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-22 PASS-Key® III+ Operation ................................ 2-14
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-4 Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 5-4
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-17 Power
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-30 Door Locks .................................................. 2-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6 Electrical System ......................................... 5-94
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-20 Reduced Engine Light .................................. 3-36

8
Power (cont.) Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-29
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-18 Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-29
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-33 Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-3
Windows .................................................... 2-11 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Privacy .......................................................... 7-16 Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-28
Event Data Recorders .................................. 7-16 Reduced Engine Power Light ............................ 3-36
Navigation System ....................................... 7-17 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-3
OnStar ....................................................... 7-17 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
Radio Frequency Identification ....................... 7-17 Operation ..................................................... 2-4
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ................. 2-7 Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-48
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-14
R Saturn ....................................................... 7-14
United States Government ............................ 7-14
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Restraint System Check
Privacy ...................................................... 7-17 Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-50
Radios .......................................................... 3-50 Replacing Restraint System Parts
Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-54 After a Crash .......................................... 1-51
Radios Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-18
Reception ................................................... 3-71 Roadside
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-51 Assistance Program ....................................... 7-7
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-70 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-22
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-44 Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-15
Limited-Slip .................................................. 4-8 Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-28

9
 S Service (cont.)
California Pershlorate Materials
Safety Belt Requirements ............................................ 5-4
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-23 California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-4
Safety Belts Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Care of ...................................................... 5-87 Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-32
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-11 Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-19 Service, Scheduling Appointments ....................... 7-9
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-22 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-48
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-21 Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-91
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-6 Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-25
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-26
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4 Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Seatback Latches ............................................. 1-5 Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-99
Seats Speedometer .................................................. 3-22
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ............................. 1-2 Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-18
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-3 Steering ........................................................ 4-11
Seatback Latches .......................................... 1-5 Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-71
Securing a Child Restraint Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-32 Storage Areas
Security Light ................................................. 3-35 Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-33
Service ........................................................... 5-3 Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-33
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3 Glove Box .................................................. 2-33
Adding Equipment to the Outside Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-22
of Your Vehicle .......................................... 5-5 Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-12

10
 T Tires (cont.)
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ................... 5-74
Tachometer .................................................... 3-22 Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-52
Taillamps Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-54
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-68
Sidemarker Lamps ................................... 5-46 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-69
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-70 Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-70
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-12 When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-65
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-12 Winter Tires ................................................ 5-51
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-14 Towing
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ............................. 2-14 Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-28
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6 Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-28
Time, Setting .................................................. 3-51 Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-28
Tire Traction
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-31 Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-6
Tires ............................................................. 5-50 Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................... 4-8
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels, Traction Control System ................................... 3-29
Cleaning ................................................. 5-90 Transmission
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-66 Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-23
Chains ....................................................... 5-72 Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-23
Cleaning .................................................... 5-91 Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-20
Different Size .............................................. 5-67 Transmission Operation, Manual ........................ 2-23
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-72 Trunk .............................................................. 2-8
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-56 Trunk Ajar Light .............................................. 3-36
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-63 Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-59 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-58

11
 U Warnings (cont.)
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-68 Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Using this Manual ............................................... iii Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-69
V Different Size .............................................. 5-67
Vehicle Replacement ............................................... 5-70
Control ........................................................ 4-3 Windows ....................................................... 2-10
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv Power ........................................................ 2-11
Loading ...................................................... 4-23 Windshield
Parking Your ............................................... 2-27 Washer ...................................................... 3-10
Symbols ......................................................... iv Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-34
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-16 Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-49
Vehicle Identification Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-89
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-93 Wipers ......................................................... 3-9
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-93 Winter Driving ................................................ 4-18
Vehicle Personalization Winter Tires ................................................... 5-51
DIC ........................................................... 3-45
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-20
Visors ........................................................... 2-12 X
XM Radio Messages ....................................... 3-69
W XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-72
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-20
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-41 Y
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6 Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

12